DCS A-10c Warthog Guide

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 432

DCS GUIDE

A-10C WARTHOG By Chuck


LAST UPDATED: 23/01/2020
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• PART 1 – INTRODUCTION & TRAINING STRUCTURE
• PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
• PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES
• PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE
• PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF
• PART 6 – LANDING
• PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
• PART 8 – HOTAS
• PART 9 – SENSORS
• PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR AND COUNTERMEASURES
• PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL
• PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL
• PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS
• PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS
• PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
• PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES

Special thanks to Paul "Goldwolf" Whittingham for creating the guide icons. 2
The Fairchild Republic A-10C Thunderbolt II is a single-seat, twin
WARTHOG turbofan engine, straight wing jet aircraft developed by Fairchild-
Republic for the United States Air Force (USAF). It is commonly
referred to by the nicknames "Warthog" or "Hog", although the A-
A-10C

10's official name comes from the Republic P-47 Thunderbolt,


a World War II fighter-bomber effective at attacking ground
targets. The A-10 was designed for close air support (CAS) of
friendly ground troops, attacking armored vehicles and tanks, and
providing quick-action support against enemy ground forces. It
entered service in 1976 and is the only production-built aircraft
that has served in the USAF that was designed solely for CAS. Its
secondary mission is to provide forward air controller – airborne
support, by directing other aircraft in attacks on ground targets.
Aircraft used primarily in this role are designated OA-10.

The A-10 was intended to improve on the performance of the A-1


Skyraider and its lesser firepower. The A-10 was designed around
the 30 mm GAU-8 Avenger rotary cannon. Its airframe was
designed for durability, with measures such as 1,200 pounds of
titanium armor to protect the cockpit and aircraft systems,
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

enabling it to absorb a significant amount of damage and continue


flying. Its short takeoff and landing capability permits operation
from airstrips close to the front lines, and its simple design
enables maintenance with minimal facilities. The A-10 served in
the Gulf War (Operation Desert Storm), the American led
intervention against Iraq's invasion of Kuwait, where the A-10
distinguished itself. The A-10 also participated in other conflicts
such as in Grenada, the Balkans, Afghanistan, Iraq, and
against Islamic State in the Middle East.

3
The A-10A single-seat variant was the only version produced, though one pre-production airframe was modified into the YA-10B twin-seat prototype to test an all-weather
WARTHOG night capable version. In 2005, a program was started to upgrade remaining A-10A aircraft to the A-10C configuration, with modern avionics for use with precision weaponry.
The U.S. Air Force had stated the F-35 would replace the A-10 as it entered service, but this remains highly contentious within the USAF and in political circles. With a variety
of upgrades and wing replacements, the A-10's service life can be extended to 2040; the service has no planned retirement date as of June 2017.
A-10C
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

4
RTFM, or “Read The F*cking Manual”, is probably one of the most commonly used expressions in DCS… especially when the A-10C is involved.
WARTHOG
These four letters represent what I hate the most about the flight sim community. “RTFM” is what you say to someone who asks for help when you want to get rid of him. The
philosophy behind this is that experienced pilots expect new guys to do their homework before they ask questions, since 99 % of the time the answer will lie somewhere in the
A-10C

671 pages long manual.

Is it fair? Yes and no. Some people genuinely dislike training new guys: it is a demanding task, it takes a lot of time and patience, and you need a structured approach and
exceptional communication skills to keep it somewhat interesting. On the other hand, giving a complex answer to someone who does not have a basic understanding of
aircraft systems may be a futile exercise. Sometimes, it is about ego: why would I give a new guy the answer when I had to read through the whole bloody manual to know this
stuff?

Whatever the reason, I think that the “RTFM” philosophy only works with someone who already has a background in aviation and is already aware of what he needs to know
to fly the aircraft. I believe that someone who has little to no background in aviation needs a little more handholding. There’s nothing wrong with that: real life Warthog pilots
are trained for weeks before they earn their wings. I don’t expect you to reach that level of proficiency. After all, flight simulation is not a full-time job: it is just a hobby.

The Warthog manual is a terrific resource, but it is a long, tedious and dry read. It is easy to feel discouraged and give up on the A-10C. I can’t tell you how many people I know
who bought the A-10C, and realized with horror that they had to go through a huge paper brick to be able to do anything. Where to start? What is important? Is everything
relevant? Can I skip some parts? Why do I need to learn this or that? All these questions overwhelm the majority of newcomers who give up and let the A-10 gather dust on
their hard drive, cursing the Flight Sim gods for their cruelty and the 40 bucks that went down the drain.
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

Therefore, I decided to create this guide to help the average Joe to be able to operate the Hog to a decent level. The structure of this document is how I would give a course to
someone who starts from scratch. Follow the guide section by section, and you should be able to know how to set up your controls, how the aircraft systems work, how to
operate your machine, how to use your weapons, how to navigate and how to stay alive.

I highly recommend that you fly the A-10C with a Thrustmaster Warthog throttle and HOTAS (Hands On Throttle-and-Stick). It’s expensive (550 bucks, yikes!), but for an aircraft
like the Warthog with so many switches… it is a necessity more than a nice-to-have. In my opinion, it is an investment that is completely worth it if you are interested in flight
sims since the quality and craftsmanship are top notch, and it just makes your life so much easier. You can fly the A-10C with a normal joystick, but be aware that you will have
a LOT (read: shit-ton) of key bindings to remember. So, just remember… stay calm, don’t panic, we’ll go through it together.

We will first see what controls you will be playing with and a general layout of the cockpit. After, we’ll see how to choose your loadout, fire up the aircraft, takeoff, fly and
navigate. We’ll get to know some fancy acronyms, see a couple of systems and how they work. Once you have all that unsavoury stuff crammed into your brain, we’ll blow
some stuff up (yay!), see how not to end up in a smoldering pile of ashes and how to get back on the ground in one piece.

Still awake? All right, let’s get to it, shall we?


5
A-10C
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION WARTHOG

6
WARTHOG
CONTROLS SETUP HOTAS: “Hands On Throttle-And-Stick”
A-10C
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

Zoom In Slow: L_Shift+TMS UP


Zoom Out Slow: L_Shift+TMS DOWN
7
A-10C
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP WARTHOG
CONTROLS SETUP

8
Note: In your controls, make sure you check your “Trim” controls since the default version of the game has your trim hat set to changing your view rather than trim the
WARTHOG aircraft. Since most of you are probably equipped with a TRACKIR already, I suggest you make sure the Trim Hat Switch is set up properly.
A-10C

To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also


select “Axis Commands” in the upper scrolling
menu.
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click


on the axis you want to modify and then click
on “Axis Tune”.

9
CONTROLS SETUP
WARTHOG
A-10C

BIND THE FOLLOWING AXES:

• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)


• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)
• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)
• THROTTLE BOTH – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM
• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT
• HOTAS SLEW HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL – CONTROLS YOUR TGP (TARGETING POD) ORIENTATION
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

10
CONTROLS SETUP
WARTHOG
A-10C

Use this pin to separate or link left and right throttles together.
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

Lock moves sideways

11
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

12
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

13
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

14
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

Pitot Tube

15
WARTHOG
A-10C

Flood Light
Utility Light
Utility Light
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

16
WARTHOG
A-10C

Ejection Seat Handle


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Emergency Manual Chute Control Handle


17
WARTHOG Formation Lights Brightness Control
A-10C

Anti-Collision Lights ON/OFF

Auxiliary Instruments Lights


Brightness Control

Accelerometer &
Compass Light Switch

Console Light
Brightness Control
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Flight Instruments
Light Brightness

Position Lights switch

Engine Instruments
Lights Brightness Signal Lights Switch
Nose Floodlight & Nose
Illumination Switch
Flood light brightness
18
WARTHOG
A-10C

Main Air Supply Switch

Cabin Temperature
Level Control

Air Conditioning
Manual/Auto Control Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Cabin Air Temperature/Pressure Control Switch


• NORM: Normal, ECS (Environmental Control System)
runs on engine bleed air
• RAM: Ram Air, ECS runs on ram air from outside the
aircraft

Cabin Pressure Altitude Indicator (x1000 ft)


Cabin Air Flow Level Control

19
WARTHOG Windshield Rain Remove/Wash
switch
Canopy De-Fog Control
A-10C

Bleed Air Control


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Windshield de-fog/de-ice

Pitot Heat

20
WARTHOG Internal Canopy Disengage Handle
AFT: Disengaged
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

21
WARTHOG
A-10C

Oxygen Supply Pressure (PSI)

Oxygen Supply
Lever ON/OFF

Oxygen Dilution Lever


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Oxygen Flow Indicator


Oxygen Indicator Test Switch

Emergency Oxygen Lever

Oxygen Quantity Indicator (L)

22
HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System) Mode Switch
WARTHOG • SLAVED: SLAVE mode, also called gyro-magnetic mode, allows the
HARS gyro to be fed by the compass signal.
• DG: Directional gyro mode. If Slave mode fails, the DG (Directional Compass LATITUDE Correction Setting Knob
A-10C

Gyro) mode acts as a backup. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled


from the compass and works autonomously.

SYNC IND
Shows sync between HARS gyro and magnetic azimuth
detector. Used in SLAVED mode.
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

HDG (Heading) Knob


Heading & Push-to-Sync Control

Magnetic Variation Selector Switch

N-S Switch
Selects which hemisphere (North/South) is in for DG and SLAVED modes.

23
WARTHOG ILS Frequency

ILS (Instrument Landing System) Volume


A-10C

Control & Frequency Selector


• Mouse Click: Tunes Volume
• Scroll Mousewheel: Tunes Frequency

TACAN Volume Control

TACAN Mode Selector


• OFF
• REC: Receive Only
ILS (Instrument Landing System) • T/R: Transmit/Receive
Power Switch & Frequency Selector • A/A REC: Air-to-Air TACAN Receive Mode
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

• Right Click: Toggles Power • A/A T/R: Air-to-Air TACAN Transmit-Receive


• Scroll Mousewheel: Tunes Frequency Mode

TACAN Channel TACAN Channel Selector

TACAN Test Button

TACAN Channel Selector

24
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)


The AAP provides the power for both the
CDU and EGI (Embedded GPS/INS) systems.
CDU (Control Display Unit)
The CDU provides the control and
information interface between you and the
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) navigation system.

25
WARTHOG EGI (Embedded GPS & Inertial
Navigation System) Power Switch
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display
A-10C

Unit) Page Selector Knob


• OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the
CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen. From OTHER you
will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view
additional information.
• POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide
information about your current position.
• STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed
information about your steerpoint.
• WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can
view basic information about your selected waypoint,
CDU (Control Display steerpoint, and your anchor point.
Unit) Power Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob


• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the
active flight plan active. If selected, use of the Steerpoint
toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT
PLAN must be selected to display the flight plan route on the
Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints
will only cycle through the markpoints that you created (A-Z).
Steerpoint Increment/Toggle
Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used.
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire
Switch
mission waypoint database

26
SYS FSK NAV FSK WP FSK OSET FSK FPM FSK
CDU (Control Display Unit) Functions System Menu Navigation Menu Waypoint Menu Offset Point Menu Flight Plan Menu
WARTHOG
EGI: Embedded GPS INS Data ALIGN: Position Alignment STEERPOINT: data on OSET: Determines FPM: Allows you to select a
selected steerpoint offset between two flight plan, create a new
points one, or edit an existing one
A-10C

Function Select Keys (FSK)


INS: Inertial Navigation System TIME: Data & Time, Desired ANCHOR PT: Anchor
Data Time On Target Point / Bullseye Data
GPS: Global Positioning System UPDATE: INS Update page WAYPOINT: Data on
Data selected waypoint
REINIT: Re-Initialization Page DTSUPLOAD: Data Transfer FROM PT: selects the
System Upload Page FROM POINT
LASTE: Low Altitude Safety and BLENDED: Combination of
Targeting Enhancement Data INS and GPS navigation input
HARS: Heading Attitude ATTRIBUTES: Course
Reference System Data Deviation Indicator (CDI) and
glide slope indicator
sensitivity
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

DTSAS: OPTIONS: current magnetic


Digital Terrain System heading and magnetic
Application Software variation
Data
RESET: Fault Reset DIVERT: 4 closest divert
airfields data
DTS: Data Transfer System

LRUTEST: Line Replaceable


Unit Test Page
OFPID: Operational Flight
Profile Identification Data
Line Select Keys (LSK) CADC: Central Air Data
Computer Data
CDUTEST: Control Display Unit
Test
MXLOG: Mission Log Data
27
SYS (System) Menu (Page 1/2)
WARTHOG
A-10C

EGI Sub-Page INS Sub-Page

GPS Sub-Page REINIT Sub-Page


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

LASTE Sub-Page HARS Sub-Page

SYS Sub-Page DTSAS Sub-Page RESET Sub-Page 28


SYS (System) Menu (Page 2/2)
WARTHOG
A-10C

DTS Sub-Page
LRUTEST Sub-Page

OFPID Sub-Page
CADC Sub-Page
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

CDU Sub-Page (Page 1) CDUTEST Sub-Page (Page 2)

SYS Sub-Page 29
MXLOG Sub-Page
NAV (Navigation) Menu
WARTHOG
A-10C

ALIGN Sub-Page TIME Sub-Page

UPDATE Sub-Page DTSUPLOAD Sub-Page


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

OPTIONS Sub-Page
ATTRIBUTES Sub-Page

30
DIVERT Sub-Page
WP (Waypoint) Menu
WARTHOG
A-10C

STEERPOINT Sub-Page 1 STEERPOINT Sub-Page 2

ANCHOR Sub-Page
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

OSET (Offset) Menu FPMENU (Flight Plan) Menu

31
CAUTION LIGHT PANEL
WARTHOG ENG START CYCLE L-HYD PRESS R-HYD PRESS GUN UNSAFE
Engine start cycle is in progress Left hydraulic system pressure Right hydraulic system pressure Gun safety is off and can be fired
below 1000 psi below 1000 psi
A-10C

ANTI-SKID L-HYD RES R-HYD RES OXY LOW


Landing gear is down and anti-skid is Left hydraulic fluid reservoir is Right hydraulic fluid reservoir is low Oxygen gauge indicates 0.5 liters
disengaged low or less (low quantity)

ELEV DISENG SEAT NOT ARMED BLEED AIR LEAK


At least one elevator is disengaged ------------ Ground safety lever is in SAFE Bleed air is 400 deg F or more
position (seat is not armed)

AIL DISENG L-AIL TAB R-AIL TAB SERVICE AIR HOT


At least one aileron is disengaged Left aileron is not at normal Right aileron is not at normal Air temperature exceeds
position due to MRFCS (Manual position due to MRFCS (Manual allowable ECS (Environmental
Reversion Flight Control System) Reversion Flight Control System) Control System) range

PITCH SAS L-ENG HOT R-ENG HOT WINDSHIELD HOT


At least one pitch SAS (Stability Left engine ITT exceeds 880 deg Right engine ITT exceeds 880 deg C Windshield temperature exceeds
Augmentation System) channel is disabled C 150 deg F

YAW SAS L-ENG OIL PRESS R-ENG OIL PRESS CICU


At least one yaw SAS (Stability Augmentation Left engine oil pressure is below Right engine oil pressure is below Central Interface Control Unit
System) channel is disabled 27.5 psi 27.5 psi failure
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

GCAS L-MAIN PUMP R-MAIN PUMP


LASTE failure detected affects GCAS (Ground Left Main Fuel Tank Booster Right Main Fuel Tank Booster Pump ------------
Collision Avoidance System) Pump Low Pressure Detected Low Pressure Detected

LASTE L-WING PUMP R-WING PUMP HARS


Fault detected in LASTE (Low Altitude Safety Left Wing Fuel Tank Booster Right Wing Fuel Tank Booster Pump HARS system Heading or Attitude
and Targeting Enhancement) computer Pump Low Pressure Detected Low Pressure Detected is invalid

IFF MODE-4 L-MAIN FUEL LOW R-MAIN FUEL LOW L-R TKS UNEQUAL
Inoperative Identify-Friend-or-Foe Mode 4 Left Main fuel tank has 500 lbs Right Main fuel tank has 500 lbs of There is a 750-lbs difference
capability is detected. of fuel or less fuel or less between two main fuel tanks

EAC L-FUEL PRESS R-FUEL PRESS NAV


EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) system is Low fuel pressure is detected in Low fuel pressure is detected in Control Display Unit failure while
turned off left engine fuel feed lines right engine fuel feed lines in navigation system alignment
mode

STALL SYS L-CONV R-CONV CADC


AFC (Automatic Flight Controls) malfunction Left electrical converter failure Right electrical converter failure Central Air Data Computer failure
or deselected detected detected

L-GEN R-GEN INST INV


Left engine generator has shut Right engine generator has shut AC powered systems are not
down or AC power is out of down or AC power is out of limits receiving power from inverter
limits 32
WARTHOG

Canopy Switch
A-10C

Canopy Jettison Handle

Boarding Ladder
Extension Button

Emergency Flood Lights


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Battery Switch

Canopy Jettison Handle


Unlock Button

AC Generator Switches
APU Generator Switch

AC Inverter Switch

33
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

CMS: Countermeasures Panel

34
WARTHOG
A-10C

Manual Canopy
Opening Assist Handle
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Canopy Handle

Flood Light
35
WARTHOG
A-10C

Left MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display) Right MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

36
Moving Map Scale
WARTHOG Adjustment Rocker Switch
MFCD Backlight Brightness
A-10C

Rocker Switch

OSB (Option Select Button)

MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display)

DCLT is used to declutter


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

MFCD Contrast Rocker Switch MFCD Brightness


Rocker Switch

MFCD Day/Night/Off Power MFCD Symbology


Mode Knob Brightness Rocker Switch

Note 1:
The four lower OSBs are Direct Access (DA) buttons (in pink) and provide direct access to the saved
MFCD displays according to master mode. Up to four pages for each MFCD may be assigned to the DA
buttons for each master mode. These pages are toggled by pressing the corresponding direct access OSB
button or they can be cycled even faster with the HOTAS buttons: Coolie Hat Short right for the right
MFCD and Coolie Hat Short left for the left MFCD.

37
1b
WARTHOG
A-10C

Saved MFCD Pages


Highlighted in Green when selected Main MFCD Menu
(Display Program) 2b

1a
2a 3a
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Note 2:

In this example, we will change the STAT (Status) saved page to the
CDU (Control Display Unit) page. Then, we will display the CDU
page.

To access a specific MFCD page:


1. Press and hold for approx. 2 seconds on one of the four DA OSBs
(Direct Access Option Select Button). The DISPLAY PROGRAM
page will appear.
2. Select desired page with its respective OSB (shown in blue) from
the Display Program page. Once selected, page will be 3b
highlighted in green.
3. Once desired page is selected, click on the DA OSB next to the
desired Saved MFCD Page slot. This will assign the Saved Page
slot to the page selected in step 2. 4
4. To display the CDU page set in step 3, press on the DA OSB next
to CDU. The CDU page will then be displayed.
38
WARTHOG
A-10C

TAD Page Selected

TGP Page Selected


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

TAD DSMS TGP STAT TGP MAV CDU MSG

Saved but not displayed on MFCD


Saved but not displayed on MFCD
Displayed on MFCD Coolie Hat Switch
Coolie Hat left Short cycles left MFCD page Displayed on MFCD
Coolie Hat right Short cycles right MFCD page
LEFT MFCD RIGHT MFCD 39
WARTHOG
A-10C

MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display) Pages


TAD (Tactical Awareness Display): STAT (Status): Review status of A-10C sub-systems
Use the digital, moving map for navigation, targeting,
and datalink purposes
TGP (Targeting Pod): LITENING targeting pod page DTS (Data Transfer System): Load navigation and
weapon data from the mission planner into the
aircraft. In the real-world, this would be done with a
Data Transfer Cartridge that loads data from the
Mission Planning Software onto the aircraft
DP Page
DSMS (Digital Stores Management System): Manage DP (Display Program): Configure which page-links
the stores of the aircraft are to be displayed on the bottom of each MFCD
MSG (Message): Send and receive text messages MAV (Maverick): Employ various models of the
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

with other units on SADL datalink network AGM-65 Maverick air-to-surface missile
CDU (Control Display Unit):
View the CDU screen display on an MFCD

40
WARTHOG
A-10C

TAD Page DSMS Page STAT Page


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

TGP Page 41
MSG Page CDU Page
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

MAV Page
DTS Page

42
Left Hydraulic System
WARTHOG Pressure Gauge (x1000 psi) Right Hydraulic System
Pressure Gauge (x1000 psi)
A-10C

Right Fuel System


Left Fuel System Quantity Indicator
Quantity Indicator (x1000 lbs)
(x1000 lbs)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Total Fuel Quantity Indicator


(x1000 lbs)

Fuel Quantity Display Selector


Internal/Main/Wing/External Wing/External Centerline

Fuel Indicator Test Switch 43


WARTHOG Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)
Engine Core (Compressor)
Engine ITT: Interstage
Speed (%RPM)
A-10C

Turbine Temperature (deg C)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Engine Fuel Flow Indicators


(x100 lbs/hour)

Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI) APU (Auxiliary Power APU EGT (Exhaust Gas
Unit) RPM (%) Temperature) Indicator (deg C)

44
WARTHOG
ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)
A-10C

Vertical Velocity Indicator


(x1000 ft/min)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Altimeter (ft)

Barometric Pressure
Setting (in Hg)

Turn & Slip Indicator

ADI Pitch Trim Knob Altimeter Mode Switch


Select normal electric mode (ELECT) or pneumatic mode (PNEU) for altimeter operation.
45 In
Barometric Pressure Setting Adjustment Knob case of a CADC (Central Air Data Computer) failure, you should set the instrument to PNEU.
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

External Stores Jettison Button


Jettisons all external stores except
Targeting Pod and ECM pods
Fire Extinguisher Discharge Switch

Left Engine Fire Detection Light APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) Fire Detection
& Fire Extinguisher Handle Light & Fire Extinguisher Handle Right Engine Fire Detection Light
& Fire Extinguisher Handle 46
Accelerometer (G) Standby Magnetic Compass
WARTHOG
A-10C

Air-to-Air Refueling READY Light

Air-to-Air Refueling LATCHED Light


Refueling boom is connected/latched

Air-to-Air Refueling DISCONNECT Light


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer


The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated green and yellow symbols.
• Low-speed symbol "\ /“
• On-speed symbol "circle“
• High-speed symbol "/ \".
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.
Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is down. 47
Mirror
WARTHOG
A-10C

Mirror Mirror

HUD (Heads-Up Display)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

48
WARTHOG
Depressible Gun Pipper Pitch Ladder (deg)
A-10C

Destination Index (Tadpole)


TVV (Total Velocity Vector) indicates relative bearing to the selected steerpoint
(also called Flight Path Marker)
Anchor Point Display (Bullseye)
G-Meter Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point to Aircraft /
Distance from aircraft to Anchor Point (nm)

TDC (Target Designation Cursor) Barometric Altitude (ft)


Airspeed (kts)
G: Ground Speed
HUD (Heads-Up Display)
T: True Airspeed Flight Path Angle (deg)
No letter: Indicated Airspeed
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Radar Altitude (ft)


Required Airspeed to meet Time-On-Target (kts) XXXX: Radar Altitude is invalid or
above 5000 ft AGL
Pave Penny Cue Index
Provide a method for acquiring the TISL (Target
Identification Set Laser) Spider Selected Steerpoint Number / Name

HUD SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk


Distance to Steerpoint (nm) / Target Elevation
DTSAS (Digital Terrain System Application Software) at the location of the CCRP Reticle (ft)
Mode and FOM (Figure of Merit) Message Shown: 0.5 nm to Steerpoint

Heading Tape / Scratchpad Data Display Time to Go (TTG) and Time on


Target Delta (TOT)

Desired Magnetic Heading Current Time


to Selected Steerpoint

SPI Sensor Indicator


STPT: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Steerpoint 49
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

50
WARTHOG
A-10C

Master Caution

UFC (Up Front Controller)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Gun READY Indicator


Canopy Unlocked Indicator

Nosewheel Steering Marker Beacon Indicator


ENGAGED Indicator
51
CMSC ( Countermeasures Set Control)
LTR (Letter) Mode Button FUNC (Function) Mode Button
Allows you to enter letter characters on Allows remote selection of CDU and AAP
WARTHOG
the HUD and CDU scratchpads functions listed underneath buttons
Special Purpose “ENT” (Enter) Button
A-10C

Special Purpose “HACK”


(Time Hack) Button
Data Page Increment Rocker Switch

Select Rocker Switch


Steerpoint Increment
Rocker Switch

Depressible Pipper
Rocker Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

HUD Brightness Intensity


Rocker Switch

Special Purpose “SPC” (Space) Button Special Purpose “MK” (Mark) Button

Special Purpose “ALT ALRT” (Altitude


Alert) Button

Special Purpose “CLR” (Clear) Button

52
Correspondance between UFC (Up-Front Control) Panel Buttons and
WARTHOG
CDU (Control Display Unit)/AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel) Functions CDU
A-10C

Function Select Keys (FSK)


UFC • SYS (System)
• NAV (Navigation)
• WP (Waypoint)
• OSET (Offset Point)
• FPM (Flight Plan Menu)
• PREV (Previous)
FUNC (Function) Mode Button
Allows remote selection of CDU and AAP
functions listed underneath buttons
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Page Selector Knob
• OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen.
From OTHER you will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view additional information.
• POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide information about your current position.
• STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed information about your steerpoint.
• WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can view basic information about your AAP
selected waypoint, steerpoint, and your anchor point.

Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob


• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the active flight plan active. If selected,
use of the Steerpoint toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT PLAN must be
selected to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints will only cycle through the
markpoints that you created (A-Z). Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used.
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire mission waypoint database 53
WARTHOG RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Airspeed Indicator (x100 kts)


White needle: Current airspeed
Hashed needle: Max airspeed
Rotary drum: decimals of main dial
Max flap & gear extension speed: 200 kts
54
WARTHOG

Lubber Line
A-10C

(Current Heading)

Range to selected Steerpoint or


TACAN station (nautical miles)
CDI (Course Deviation Indicator)

Course Selector Indicator

Aircraft Symbol

HSI Heading Setting Bug


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)

HSI Course Selector Knob


HSI Heading Bug Setting Knob

55
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference
WARTHOG System) Mode Selector
ABLE/STOW ADI (Attitude Director
A-10C

Indicator) Localizer Bar Switch

EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode


Selector

TISL (Target Identification


Set Laser) Mode Selector

UHF Homing Light


When the UHF control panel is set to
ADF (Automatic Direction Finder)
STR PT (Steer Point) Mode Selector
mode, the UHF light will turn amber
Course Deviator Indicator (CDI) on the
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)


operates in relationship to a steer point.
FM Homing Light
When the VHF/FM control panel is set to
homing mode, the FM light will turn amber.

ANCHR (Anchor Point / Bullseye)


HSI and Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
needles will point to the Anchor Point
(Bullseye).

ILS (Instrumented Landing


NMSP/NIMSIP: NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL System) Mode Selector
• HARS and EGI send data to HUD, ADI and HSI and cannot be used at the same
time. HARS is usually used as a backup system to EGI.
• TISL, TACAN and ILS use beacons and stations to navigate to and cannot be TCN (TACAN) Mode Selector
56
used at the same time.
TISL (Target Identification Set Laser) Mode Selector
WARTHOG TISL system detects and tracks reflected laser energy. TISL does NOT emit any laser energy; it is a passive-only system. The TISL can be
used to locate targets being laser designated by another asset such as another aircraft or ground forces. This panel is not functionally
implemented in this simulation. With the A-10C, all laser spot detection is done with the targeting pod in LSS/LST modes.
• Modes: OFF / CAGE / DIVE / LVL NAR / LVL WIDE
A-10C

TISL slant range selection


OVER 10 nm/5-10 nm/UNDER 5 nm

TISL Altitude Above Target Indicator


(x1000 ft)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

TISL Function Buttons


ENTER / OVER TEMP / BITE (test) / TRACK

TISL Code Selector Thumb Wheels


and Indicators

TISL Code Select Switch


What system searches for entered laser code
• TISL/BOTH/AUX
57
WARTHOG
A-10C

Auxiliary Landing Gear


Extension Handle
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Pedal Adjustment Handle

Circuit Breaker Panel

58
WARTHOG
Master Mode Toggle Button
Weapon Release Button
A-10C

Trim Hat Switch


UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
TMS (Target Management Switch)
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

Gun Trigger
(Two Stages)

DMS (Data Management Switch)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT

HOTAS Stick

CMS (Countermeasures Switch)


UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT/PRESS
Nosewheel Steering Button

59
SAI (Standby Attitude Indicator)
WARTHOG
A-10C

SAI (Standby Attitude Indicator)


Caging Knob
UHF Radio Frequency Repeater
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Clock AOA (Angle of Attack)


60
Indicator (deg)
WARTHOG

Master Arm Switch


A-10C

Laser Arming Switch ARM/SAFE/TRAINING


GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude
ARM/SAFE/TRAINING
Correction) Arming Switch
• ARM: Gun Armed, PAC enabled
• SAFE: Gun Not Armed, PAC disabled
• GUNARM, Gun Armed, PAC disabled

TGP (Targeting Pod) Power Switch


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

AHCP (Armament
HUD Control Panel)

HUD Modes Selector


Normal/Standby

ALT SCE (Altitude Source) Selector HUD modes Selector


• BARO: Altitude derived from Barometric Day/Night
Pressure
• DELTA: Altitude derived from difference
between barometric and radar altimeter IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire
• RADAR: Altitude derived from Radar Control Computer) Power Switch
Altimeter

JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) Power Switch


HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System)
Fast Erect Button
Corrects HARS errors CICU (Central Interface Control Unit) Power Switch 61
Landing Gear Position Indicator Anti-Skid Switch
WARTHOG UP: ON
Light
• LSAFE/NSAFE: Down and Locked Landing/Taxi Lights Switch
• Extinguished: Up and Locked
A-10C

Landing Gear Downlock


Solenoid Override Button
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Flaps Position Indicator (deg)

TEMS (Turbine Engine


Monitoring System) Switch
Provides engine diagnostic data for
Landing Gear Control Lever 62
maintenance support.
WARTHOG
Manual Canopy
Opening Assist Handle
A-10C

TV Function (Not functional)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Video Selector TV/HUD


(Not Functional)

Seat Height Adjustment Switch

Emergency Brake Handle 63


Fuselage EXT TKS Switch
WARTHOG Transfer fuel from external fuselage tank Signal Amplifier Switch
(not functional)
Wing EXT TKS Switch
A-10C

Transfers fuel from external wing tanks


Exterior Lighting Brightness Control Knob
Used to help during aerial refueling

Fuel Crossfeed Switch

Fuel Line Check Button


Internal Fuel Tank Gate
(not functional)
Open/Close

Wing Fuel Tank Boost


Pump Switches
Air Refueling Door Control Lever
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Open/close refueling port slipway door

Fill Wing Fuel Tank Disable


Used when battle damage is sustained
Main Fuel Tank Boost
Pump Switches

Fill Main Fuel Tank Disable


Used when battle damage is sustained

64
Refueling & Indexer Light Brightness
WARTHOG
A-10C

Night Vision Imaging System


(NVIS) Control Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Weapon Station Status Lights


Dimmer (Not Functional)

HARS/SAS (Heading &


Attitude Reference System / Fire Detect Bleed Air Leak
Stability Augmentation Signal Lights Test Button Test Button
System) Override Switch
65
External Lights “Pinky” Switch
WARTHOG This switch can be seen as a “Master Lights” switch.
• FWD: Retains set illumination levels for formation lights, nose floodlights and nacelle
floodlights. Sets position lights to STEADY and disables anti-collision lights.
• MIDDLE: Turns off all external lights
A-10C

• AFT: Lights are set according to lighting control panel settings.

Left & Right Throttles


Left Throttle Button
Toggles Autopilot
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Slew Control Switch


Speed Brake Switch

Microphone Switch
• FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM)
• DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio

Boat Switch

China Hat Switch


Coolie Hat Switch 66
WARTHOG
Ejection Seat Handle
A-10C

Shoulder Harness Lever


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

67
WARTHOG
A-10C

Engine Flow Switches


NORM: No exceeding ITT is possible
OVERRIDE: Exceeding ITT is possible

Engine Operation Switches


IGN: Manual Engine Ignition
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

NORM: Normal Engine Ignition


MOTOR: Purge Engine Combustion Chamber

APU Starter Switch


(Auxiliary Power Unit)

Throttle Friction Control

Landing Gear Warning Silence Switch


Flaps Control Switch
• Position 1: UP (0 deg)
• Position 2: MVR (Maneuver) (7 deg for takeoff)
• Position 3: DN (Down, 20 deg)
If airspeed exceeds 185 KIAS, the flaps cannot be extended. If the flaps are extended and the aircraft 68
reaches 185 KIAS or greater, the flaps will automatically retract to the UP position.
WARTHOG SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
A-10C

Takeoff Trim Indicator Light

Yaw Trim Control Knob


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Takeoff Trim Control Button

Monitor Test Switch


(Not Functional)

69
WARTHOG

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


A-10C

IFF (Identify Friend or Foe) Panel Control) Switch

Radar Altimeter Switch

Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button

Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode


Selector Switch
• PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

LASTE (Low Altitude Safety and Targeting


Enhancement) Control Panel

70
WARTHOG
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM Radio #1 Control Panel VHF Radio Volume Control Knob
VHF AM Radio Function Selector
A-10C

EMER FM: Emergency FM Guard Frequency


EMER AM: Emergency AM Guard Frequency
MAN: Manual Frequency
PRE: Preset Channel

UHF Radio Preset Channel Indicator

UHF Radio Test Display Button

UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials


VHF Radio Frequency Dials
AN/ARC-164 UHF Radio Control Panel
VHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials OFF


TR: Transmit-Receive
DF: VHF Direction Finder
UHF Radio Function Selector
OFF
MAIN
BOTH
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder

UHF Radio Tone Switch VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector

UHF Radio Volume Control Knob UHF Radio Preset Channel Selector

UHF Radio Status Button


UHF Radio Squelch Switch
UHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
MNL: Manual
PRESET
GRD (Guard Frequency)
71
WARTHOG Speed Brake Emergency
Left Aileron Disengaged Light
Retraction Switch
A-10C

Left/Right Aileron Emergency


Disengage Control Switch

Pitch/Roll Trim Emergency


Override Control Switch
Flaps Emergency Retraction
Switch
Trim Emergency Pitch/Roll
Right Aileron Disengaged Light Control Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Left Elevator Disengaged Light

Left/Right Elevator Emergency


Disengage Control Switch
Manual Reversion Flight
Control System (MRFCS) Right Elevator Disengaged Light
FWD: Flight Controls Normal
AFT: Manual Reversion

72
WARTHOG

HM (Hot Microphone) Switch


A-10C

Intercom Volume Control


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Audio Control Switches


• INT: Intercom Audio Power
• FM: VHF/FM Receiver Audio Power
INTERCOM Selector Switch • UHF: UHF Receiver Audio Power
Selects which radio your microphone is speaking to • VHF: VHF/AM Receiver Audio Power
INTERCOM Call Button • AIM: AIM-9 Sidewinder Seeker Tone Audio Power
• IFF: Interrogation Tone Audio Power
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Localizer/Marker
Beacon Tone Audio Power
• TCN: TACAN Tone Audio Power
73
WARTHOG
A-10C

IFF Antenna Control


Switch
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Stall Warning System


Volume Control Knob

Stall Warning System


UHF Antenna PEAK PRFM Volume
Control Switch Control Knob
EGI HAVEQUICK Time
of Day Select Switch
(NOT FUNCTIONAL)

74
WARTHOG
A-10C

VHF Radio Volume Control Knob


AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM Radio #2
Control Panel
VHF FM Radio Function Selector
EMER FM: Emergency FM Guard Frequency
EMER AM: Emergency AM Guard Frequency
MAN: Manual Frequency
PRE: Preset Channel
VHF Radio Frequency Dials
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

VHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector


OFF
TR: Transmit-Receive
DF: VHF Direction Finder

KY-58 Secure Voice Control Panel VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
(not functional)

75
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG
Utility Light

Canopy Handle

76
WARTHOG

DTC (Data Transfer


A-10C

Cartridge) Access
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Arm Ground Safety


Anti-G Suit Test Valve Override Switch
77
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

78
Environmental Sensor Pitot
WARTHOG In an emergency situation during the pilot escape initiation, the seat moves up the rails leaving the aircraft. Pitot tubes
on the top of the seat near the parachute container are exposed to the airstream. Pitot and Static pressure inputs to the
environmental sensing unit act on the speed and altitude transducers to establish the safest mode for the pilot
involved, based on the speed and altitude environment
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

79
WARTHOG
A-10C

AN/ALQ-131 ECM (Electronic


Countermeasure) Pod
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

AN/AAQ-28 LITENING AT Pod

AAS-35 “Pave Penny” Laser Marked Target Receiver Pod

80
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

GAU-8A 30 mm Gun

UHF/TACAN Antenna

81
WARTHOG
MXU-648 Travel Pod
AN/ASQ-T50 TCTS Pod Used to carry luggage
Used for training exercises. Records airspeed,
A-10C

attitude, and other flight parameters, whilst also


recording (simulated) missile launches and gun fire
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

TK600 External Fuel Tank


(600 gal)

BRU-42LS Triple Ejector Rack

82
WARTHOG
A-10C

Anti-Collision Lights Switch


If the External Lights Pinky Switch is set
Forward (Default Light Settings), the Taxi/Landing Light Switch
Anti-Collision switch will always spring
Position Lights switch back to OFF.

External Lights “Pinky” Switch


This switch can be seen as a “Master Lights” switch.
• FWD: Retains set illumination levels for formation lights, nose floodlights and nacelle
floodlights. Sets position lights to STEADY and disables anti-collision lights.
• MIDDLE: Turns off all external lights
• AFT: Lights are set according to lighting control panel settings.
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Formation Lights
Brightness Control

Nose Floodlight & Nose


Illumination Switch

83
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

Landing Light

Taxi Light

84
WARTHOG
Formation Light
Position Light (Green)
A-10C

Formation Light

Formation Light

Formation Light
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Position Light (White)

Formation Light

Formation Light 85
Position Light (Red)
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

Formation Light
Formation Light

86
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Formation Light

Formation Light
Formation Light

Formation Light

87
WARTHOG
A-10C

Anti-Collision Light (Blinking) Anti-Collision Light (Blinking)


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Anti-Collision Light (Blinking)

88
Exterior Lighting Brightness Control Knob
WARTHOG Used to help during aerial refueling
A-10C

Refueling Port Door


Open & Illuminated
Air Refueling Door Control Lever
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Open/close refueling port slipway door

89
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

Nose Floodlight
Nose Floodlight

90
WARTHOG
A-10C

HUD Night Mode


PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

HUD Day Mode

HUD modes Selector Switch


Day/Night 91
WARTHOG
Rudders
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

Elevator

Flaps Ailerons & Airbrakes

92
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES

NIGHT VISION GOGGLES


ON/OFF: RSHIFT + H
BRIGHTNESS + : RCTRL + RSHIFT + H
BRIGHTNESS - : RALT + RSHIFT + H
93
A-10C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & GAUGES WARTHOG

94
A-10C
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE WARTHOG

95
PRE-START a

WARTHOG • You can request the ground crew to retract the boarding
ladder by calling the ground crew with the interphone.
c
a) Press “\” (Communication Menu)
b) Select Ground Crew by pressing “F8” b
A-10C

c) Select “Stow boarding ladder” by pressing “F4”

d Boarding Ladder
Extension Button
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

Boarding Ladder 96
PRE-START 3
1. Battery - ON 2
WARTHOG
2. Inverter – STBY
5 1
3. Emergency Flood Lights – ON (if doing a night
operation)
A-10C

4. AC Generators – PWR
5. Hold Signal Lights Lamp Test switch and 8
confirm that caution light panel is functioning
6. Oxygen – ON
7. Hold OXY IND TEST switch and confirm that
warning message for LOW OXY is displayed
and audible
8. Hold Test Fuel Indicator switch to confirm fuel
indicator is working properly 4
9. Close Canopy by holding the canopy switch
DOWN (right click) or pressing “LCTRL+C”
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

7b

7a

9
7b 97
PRE-START
WARTHOG 10. Set up radios
a) Set VHF AM Radio #1 to TR (transmit-receive)
b) Set UHF radio to MAIN
c) Set VHF FM Radio #2 to TR (transmit-receive).
A-10C

d) Set proper radio frequencies as required.


11. Boost pumps for MAIN and WING tanks - ON

10a
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

10b

11

10c

98
START PROCEDURE SUMMARY FUEL
WARTHOG
IGNITION/STARTER
A-10C

ELECTRICAL POWER

APU GENERATOR AIR PRESSURE


BATTERY SWITCH ON APU
FUEL PUMPS ON AUXILIARY
APU START SWITCH POWER UNIT APU BLEED AIR
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

FUEL PUMPS ON
FUEL VALVE
THROTTLE AT IDLE
ENGINE START

THROTTLE AT IDLE STARTER/IGNITER

99
APU START APU Exhaust Gas Temperature (deg C)
12. APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) switch – START
WARTHOG
13. Wait until APU RPM reaches 100 %, then set APU
Generator switch – ON.
A-10C

Note: The APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) generator


supplies electrical power to the engine, and the APU
bleed air will drive the engine starter.

13

13 APU RPM (%)


PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

12

100
ENGINE START 20
14. Verify both Engine Operation switches are in NORM position
WARTHOG
15. Crank up left engine by moving left throttle from OFF to IDLE (RALT+HOME). This
will automatically initiate a left engine start with the automatic ignition. Once
throttle is moved to IDLE, the DC fuel boost pumps will activate to feed that engine.
A-10C

• Note: On Warthog Throttle, you need to physically raise/pull up the


throttle.
16. During start, ENG START CYCLE indication will be visible.
17. Confirm oil pressure increases during start. Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT)
will spike at 900 °C but will stabilize between 275 and 865 °C.
18. Wait until engine spools up to a stabilized core RPM of 56 % when idling on the 17
ground. Monitor Left Hydraulic system pressure build-up, which should normalize
between 2,800 and 3,350 PSI.
18
19. When engine reaches IDLE RPM, hydraulic pumps kick in and oil pressure has
stabilized, L-GEN, L-HYD PRESS and L-ENG OIL PRESS cautions will extinguish.
20. When Master Caution warning sound is heard, click on “MASTER CAUTION” switch.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

16 L-HYD PRESS
Caution 18
14

15 IDLE POSITION
L-ENG OIL
19
PRESS Caution

19

L-GEN Caution

17
19

101
OFF POSITION
ENGINE START
21. Crank up right engine by moving right throttle from
WARTHOG
OFF to IDLE (RCTRL +HOME). Wait until engine
spools up to IDLE settings as shown previously. 21b
22. APU Generator – OFF/RESET
A-10C

23. APU switch – OFF

23
22
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

21d

21b IDLE POSITION

OFF POSITION

102
21c 21a
POST-START
24. Set Pitot Heat Switch – ON (FWD)
WARTHOG
25. Set CDU (Control Display Unit) switch – ON
26. Set EGI (Embedded GPS-INS) switch – ON
27. Once EGI switch is ON, navigation system alignment
A-10C

will start and take approx. 4 minutes. The alignment


status can be monitored on the CDU – ALIGN sub-
page, but the MFCDs are not powered yet. We will
come back to it later.
28. Uncage Standby Attitude Indicator (SAI)
29. Turn ON left and right MFCD (Multi-Function Color
Display) screens by left-clicking twice on each power 29
switch. 28
30. Set CICU (Central Interface Control Unit) switch – ON.
The MFCDs will turn to blue.
31. Set JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) switch – ON
• JTRS Powers Situational Awareness Datalink
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

(SADL), which helps you to identify and see


friendly/enemy forces on your monitors

25 26
24 31
30a
30b

103
POST-START
32. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – TEST
WARTHOG
(middle position)
33. Press “ENT” on the UFC (Up Front Controller) to engage Preflight 33b
BIT
A-10C

• This will run an automated BIT (Built-In Test), which will


take about 1 minute. The IFFCC does all these fancy
calculations for weapon release, attitude control and HUD
indications.
34. Once BIT is complete, press “ENT” on the UFC to exit the
PREFLIGHT BIT menu.
35. Scroll down HUD menus using the “SEL” button and select EXIT by 34
pressing the “ENT” button on the UFC.
36. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – ON (UP
position)
37. Pitch and Yaw SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches – ON
38. Hold TAKEOFF TRIM switch for 1-2 seconds. Pressing this button
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

will automatically set all trim tabs to neutral, takeoff settings. 37 38


When all trim tabs have been set to the proper setting, the takeoff
trim light above the button will light and indicate TAKEOFF TRIM

32

33a

36
35b 35a

104
POST-START
39. Once you have a “DTS UPLOAD” page appears on your MFCD (Data Transfer System Upload), press the OSB (“Option Selection Button” on side of the screen) next to “Load All”. This
WARTHOG
will load the DTS (Data Transfer System) cartridge in your flight computer, which stocks your mission waypoints, weapon data, bullseye data and other navigation data set up from the
mission editor.
• NOTE: Data transfer will take about 15 seconds
A-10C

40. Once DTS cartridge is loaded, the white DSMS, INVT and CMBT cautions will disappear and asterisks will appear next to every menu (* means loaded).
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

39

40

105
POST-START
41. Select the OSB next to “CDU” (Control Display Unit) on the
WARTHOG
right MFCD to display EGI (Embedded GPS-INS) Alignment
data on this screen.
• Once the alignment status timer goes to “T = 4.0 0.8”,
A-10C

the EGI is aligned. EGI Alignment Status


42. Set STEERPOINT selector to FLIGHT PLAN. This will allow you
to use waypoints on your HUD and TAD to navigate. 41c
43. On the right MFCD where CDU data is displayed, select NAV 30
mode by pressing the OSB next to the NAV menu. Once NAV
mode is selected, an asterisk will appear next to it.

41a
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

41b

EGI Alignment Complete


41d

42

43

106
POST-START
44. Select the OSB next to “TAD” (Tactical Awareness Display) on
WARTHOG
the left MFCD to display TAD data on this screen.
45. Set CMS (Countermeasures) mode to “MAN”
46. Set MWS (Missile Warning System), JMR (Electronic
A-10C

Countermeasures Jammer), RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) and


DISP (Countermeasure Dispenser) switches ON.
47. Engage Nosewheel Steering (pinky switch on HOTAS) stick). You
can also use the “INSERT” key.

47 Nosewheel Steering Button


PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

45

44 46

107
POST-START
48. Set Anti-Skid Switch – ON 48
WARTHOG
49. Select EGI (Embedded GPS Inertial Navigation System) navigation mode.
50. Set EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) Switch – ARMED
51. Set RDR ALTM (Radar Altimeter) Switch – NORMAL
A-10C

52. Arm Ejection Seat (Lever DOWN). SEAT NOT ARMED caution should disappear.
53. Check your Caution Panel: any message displayed on it will tell you if you forgot
something.
49

52a
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

50
51

52b

52b

52a
53
108
PRE-FLIGHT – WHAT YOU NEED TO DO, AND WHY IT MATTERS
WARTHOG
Some people start their aircraft and are up in the air 10 minutes later.
A-10C

Some people start their aircraft and are up in the air 1 hour later.

It’s not always a matter of how “quickly” you can go through the start-up procedure. It is mostly a matter of flying your aircraft “smartly”. The A-10C is an incredibly
complex module, and it is no surprise that the DCS manual is more than 650 pages long. This guide will not teach you everything a real life A-10C pilot does: it would
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

probably take much more than 1000 pages and months to learn. This guide is meant to be a quick n’ dirty tutorial to start the machine, communicate and operate with
other players, fly and destroy targets while staying alive. You will not learn how to use every bomb. You will not learn how to use advanced functionalities of the CDU. You
will not learn every tactic, every manoeuver, every emergency procedure… What you’ll learn is the basics that allow you to build a solid knowledge basis that will allow
you to expand upon it by reading the manual.

Many new pilots complain about the length of the start-up procedure and think that doing the pre-flight checks we’re about to do is a huge waste of time since you
spend 5 to 10 more minutes on the ground instead of flying. In all honesty, I thought that way too at the beginning. I wanted action, and I just thought that firing up the
Hog and taking off as quickly as possible was the most efficient way to go find some trouble. Experience taught me that it is better to spend 5 additional minutes on the
ground to prepare your systems in a relaxed environment than to spend 10 minutes in the air in a stressful situation to do the same task. You are much more likely to
make mistakes and start panicking when you are in a stressful situation, just like pilots in real life. Be structured, be prepared, and you will be amazed to realize how
much more efficient you can be.

One of the key things I tell new guys is to concentrate on your systems when you are on the ground and to concentrate on flying when you are in the air. One of the
biggest challenges for modern aircraft is the workload: it is critical to manage this workload properly if you do not want to be overwhelmed by it. Set up your systems
properly on the ground so you don’t have to worry about them in the air.

There are the things you can do on the ground that will save you precious time and brain cells:
1. Identify yourself on the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) and identify your wingmen
2. Programming your weapons using the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System)
3. Setting up your countermeasure programs (or simply use a preset program that suits your needs).
4. Set up your radio frequencies (usually given through mission briefing)
5. Get to know your flight plan in advance (consult waypoints/steerpoints on your TAD)

Example of full mission in multiplayer: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zRgoUqfiO5I 109


PRE-FLIGHT – IDENTIFYING YOURSELF ON THE TAD
WARTHOG
The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) allows you to know where you are, and who is next to you.
A-10C

In a single-player mission, you are unlikely to fully appreciate the functionality behind the TAD. A multiplayer session allows you to
better understand why the TAD is so useful and how it should be used to give you information that is both precise, concise and
relevant. A common practice to do when your TAD is loaded is to set your own ID. You have both a GROUP ID and a personal OWN
ID. You don’t really need to touch the GROUP ID (apart from situations where there are way too many planes in a same sector,
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

which is unlikely to happen in DCS), but setting up your OWN ID is useful for your wingman. Why? Because if you set your own ID,
all members with your same GROUP ID will be able to see your OWN ID pop up on their TAD. For instance, if I set my OWN ID to
“19” and my GROUP ID to “1”, every person in GROUP ID #1 will see an icon with “19” pop on their TAD. This way, they can know
where I am. They can even send me messages, target locations and track my position using the HUD and their flight computers!
To set up your own ID:
1. Click on “NET” OSB on your TAD.
2. Enter your desired ID number on your UFC (Up Front Controller) 2
3. Press the “OWN ID” OSB to set your OWN ID to the number you just entered through the UFC.
4. You can go back to the TAD by clicking the “TAD” OSB.
4
3

1b

1a

110
PRE-FLIGHT – DSMS, OR HOW TO MANAGE YOUR BOMBS, MISSILES AND SHIT
WARTHOG
When you spawn, you typically have a set of various weapons mounted on your wing pylons. The reality is that more often than not, you will want to change your loadout
and set it to your own liking.
A-10C

This is where the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System), also nicknamed “DIZMAS” comes into play. Most WWII/Korea/Vietnam era weapons were relatively simple
since most of the aiming was done manually or with gyro-assisted gunsights. However, with the coming age of computers, dropping bombs and guiding missiles with pin-
point accuracy became possible. Ground strikes became much more precise, but such complexity required an interface for the pilot to work with. In order to manage
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

“smart” bombs and missiles, the DSMS was created to help the pilot to program them: how many are launched, how they behave, how and when they explode, etc.

It is easy to feel overwhelmed by the DSMS page at first. You can customize pretty much anything you could think of on any kind of ordnance you are carrying. No need to
panic yet: there is no way in hell you will be able to remember every single procedure by heart. We will simply explore together how the Dizmas works, so you can
operate it by yourself and know what you are doing… without ever needing to read this godawful wall of text ever again. Deal?

First, we will assume that you are starting your mission from scratch and that you load your weapons manually using “\” and the Ground Crew. The DSMS cannot “guess”
if you changed your weapon loadout or not, so you need to tell the computer to check or re-check what ordnance is loaded.

NOTE: You can avoid having to re-load your DSMS by simply spawning, choosing your desired loadout, and only then proceed with the start-up procedure.

111
WRONG DSMS LOADOUT GOOD DSMS LOADOUT
HOW TO RELOAD DSMS
WARTHOG
A-10C

3
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

1 2 4

2) Click and hold “MSG” OSB until you see 3) Click on “Load” OSB on the right menus
1) Click on “CDU” menu OSB on right MFCD 4) Click on lower “MSG” OSB. OSB will change from “MSG” to “LOAD”.
the menus appear next to the right OSBs.

6) Click on “LOAD ALL” OSB on the right to reload all DSMS stations. 112
5) Click on the new lower “LOAD” OSB menu.
Reload is complete when asterisks appear next to every menu.
HOW TO MODIFY 3
WARTHOG
WEAPON PROFILES 2 4
CURSOR
1. From the MAIN DSMS menu, select “PROF” OSB. 7
A-10C

2. Move green cursor using the OSBs to the left to cycle


through weapon profiles.
3. Once green cursor is next to desired weapon profile,
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

select “VIEW PRO” OSB to open profile


2
settings/options.
4. Select appropriate firing mode (Ripple Single is
recommended) and choose what setting on the right 6
OSB row you want to modify.
5. Using the UFC scratch pad, enter in the HUD the new
value for the setting you want to modify (ex: “1” for
RIPPLE QUANTITY)
6. Select appropriate OSB for the setting you want to NOTE: You can click “CHANGE SETTINGS” to
change (ex: “RIP QTY”). access additional weapon release settings.
7. Click “Save” OSB to save profile once all settings are
OK.

1
NOTE: In other words, you modify a profile setting by
entering the new setting value from the scratch pad
first, and THEN you select the setting you want to
apply this value to. Note that some settings like
CCRP/CCIP weapon release mode do not require user
input from UFC scratch pad: you can just click the OSB NUMBERS ENTERED FROM UFC
next to the parameter to toggle it.

“CLEAR” UFC IF YOU MADE A MISTAKE OR 113


GET THE “ERR” NOTICE ON HUD.
MISSION LOADOUT RECOMMENDED WEAPON LOADOUT
WARTHOG
STATION STORE DESCRIPTION
A-10C

1 AN/ALQ-131 ECM JAMMER POD Electronic Countermeasures


ESSENTIAL
Jammer Pod

2 7 x 2.75 in M-151 Rockets Unguided Rocket Pod


PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

3 2 x AGM-65D MAVERICK Air-to-Ground Missile 125 lbs


D variant: Infrared Seeker

4 3 x MK-82 General Purpose Unguided Bomb

5 1 x GBU-38 Guided Bomb (JDAM)

6 EMPTY

7 1 x GBU-38 Guided Bomb (JDAM)

8 3 x MK82 General Purpose Unguided Bomb

9 2 x AGM-65H MAVERICK Air-to-Ground Missile 125 lbs


H variant: Electro-Optical Seeker

ESSENTIAL 10 AN/AAQ-28 LITENING POD Targeting Pod (TGP)

11 2 x AIM-9M SIDEWINDER Air-to-Air Missile

GUN 1150 rounds GAU-8 30 MM GUN


Combat Mix

FLARE DISPENSER 120 Disrupts IR heat-seeking missiles

CHAFF DISPENSER 240 Disrupts semi-active radar


homing missiles

FUEL 75 %
114
TAXI Anti-Skid Engaged
WARTHOG Nosewheel Steering Engaged
1. Ensure ANTI-SKID is on.
2. Ensure Nosewheel Steering is ON (keyboard binding:
A-10C

“INSERT”).
3. Move throttles forward slowly as required to start
forward movement
4. Use the rudder pedals to steer the aircraft left and right;
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

do not use differential braking to steer.


5. Taxi speed should be between 15 and 25 knots.
6. While taxiing, the canopy should never be opened or
closed while turning.
7. Use the toe brakes to slow and stop the aircraft.

Nosewheel Steering Button

115
TAKEOFF
WARTHOG
1. Line up on the runway
2. Make sure your Pitot Heat is ON during cold conditions.
A-10C

3. Press the TAKEOFF TRIM switch to ensure you are trimmed for takeoff.
4. Set flaps for takeoff (MVR middle position, 7 deg) and ensure speedbrakes are retracted.
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

4
4

Nosewheel Steering Button


116
TAKEOFF
WARTHOG
5. Hold down brakes, MAX throttle.
6. Release brakes and start rolling.
A-10C

7. Disengage Nosewheel Steering (OFF) when you reach 70 kts.


8. Rotate at 135 kts. Set Landing Gear Lever UP and set Flaps UP.
9. Start climbing at a 10 deg AoA (Angle of Attack) angle. Do not
yank back on the stick to get airborne: let it fly off the runway by
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF

itself.

117
A-10C
PART 5 – MISSION PREPARATION & TAKEOFF WARTHOG
TAKEOFF

118
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
1. Initial Approach
A-10C

• Maintain altitude of 2000 ft


• Keep airspeed between 250-300 kts
2. Downwind leg
• Maintain altitude of 2000 ft
• Keep airspeed between 200-250 kts
3. Base Leg
• Maintain altitude of 1500 ft
• Maintain airspeed of 150 kts
4. Before Glide Path Final Approach
• Extend Airbrakes (40 %)
• Lower Landing Gear
• Flaps DOWN (fully extended)
5. On Glide Path Final Approach
• -500 ft/min descent rate
6. Touchdown by letting yourself glide on the runway.
No need to flare.
PART 6 – LANDING

119
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING

120
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
A-10C

AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer


The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated
green and yellow symbols.
• Low-speed symbol "\ /“
• On-speed symbol "circle“
• High-speed symbol "/ \".
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and
PART 6 – LANDING

low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.


Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is
down.

121
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING

122
NORMAL 360-DEGREE LANDING APPROACH
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 6 – LANDING

123
WARTHOG
GENERAL ELECTRIC TF-34 ENGINE
The A-10C is powered by General Electric TF-34-GE-100A engine. The TF-34 is a high-bypass turbofan that generates 85% of its thrust with bypass air. To do so, it uses a
A-10C

single-stage bypass fan and a 14-stage axial flow compressor. Because the vast majority of thrust is generated by the bypass fan, the best indication of thrust in the cockpit is
from the fan speed indicators. Bleed air can be siphoned from the fan to power additional systems.

Each engine is housed in a nacelle


with maintenance doors that provide
easy access. At maximum thrust,
each engine produces 8,900 pounds
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

of standard thrust at sea level on a


standard day.

Although there has long been talk


about upgrading the A-10 engines,
this has yet to actually happen. As
such, the A-10 is not a speed demon,
but it does have reliable, fuel
economic and durable engines in its
current form.

From engine IDLE to MAX takes


approximately 10 seconds at sea
level. Thrust (amount of fuel supplied
to the engines) is governed by the
two throttle levers in the cockpit.

124
WARTHOG
GENERAL ELECTRIC TF-34 ENGINE
The TF-34-GE-100A engines of the A-10C are placed in a rather
A-10C

unusual configuration: they are mounted high on the rear fuselage


between the wings and the rear stabilizers. The vertical stabs provide
additional protection against small arms fire: it is an intelligent
design choice when you consider the fact that the A-10C is a ground-
pounder and sometimes has to go pretty close to provide accurate
close air support (CAS) to the troops on the ground.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Some of the advantages are quite interesting:

• The high mounting reduces the likelihood of the engines


ingesting Foreign Object Debris (FOD) when operating from
rough, forward bases in war-time.
• Engines can remain running when aircraft is being rearmed and
refueled. This leads to faster mission turn-around.
• Ease of servicing the engines.
• Reduced IR signature from below due to the shielding of the
horizontal stabilizer.

125
WARTHOG
ENGINE CONTROLS & PARAMETERS
Here is an overview of engine parameters.
A-10C

Engine Flow Switches


Engine ITT: Interstage Engine Throttles
Engine Core (Compressor) NORM: No exceeding ITT is possible
Turbine Temperature (deg C) OVERRIDE: Exceeding ITT is possible
Speed (%RPM) Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Engine Fuel Flow Indicators


(x100 lbs/hour) Engine Operation Switches
IGN: Manual Engine Ignition
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI)
NORM: Normal Engine Ignition
MOTOR: Purge Engine Combustion Chamber 126
WARTHOG
APU (AUXILIARY POWER UNIT)
Located in the rear fuselage between the engine mounts is the APU (Auxiliary
A-10C

Power Unit).

The APU is a small engine in itself and draws fuel to run. When running, the
APU supplies compressed air to turn the compressor fans to start the engines.
The APU also drives an electrical generator and a hydraulic pump.

Once both engines are started and their generators enabled, the APU and APU
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

generator can be shut down. You would only need to use the APU again in case
of an engine re-start.

APU Exhaust

APU Generator Switch

APU EGT (Exhaust Gas


Temperature) Indicator (deg C)

APU Starter Switch


APU (Auxiliary Power
(Auxiliary Power Unit) 127
Unit) RPM (%)
Engine ITT: Interstage
Engine Core (Compressor)
ENGINE & APU LIMITS Turbine Temperature (deg C)
Speed (%RPM)
WARTHOG Engine Fan Speed (%RPM)
Here is an overview of engine parameters limits as per the Eagle Dynamics user
A-10C

manual.

Engine Oil Pressure:


• Maximum: 95 psi
• Normal IDLE range: 55 to 85 psi
• Acceptable when core RPM is 85 %: 40 to 55 psi
• Minimum Pressure: 40 psi
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Engine Core Speed:


• Engine operation should not exceed 102 %
• Engine operation between 100 and 102 % should not exceed 3 seconds
• Normal operating range should be between 56 and 98 %

Engine Fan Speed:


• Normal operation is approx 82 % at takeoff

Engine ITT (Interstage Turbine Temperature):


• Stabilized temperature above 865 deg C indicates engine malfunction
• A short period at 900 deg C is possible during engine start
• Normal operating range is between 275 and 865 deg C

Engine Fuel Flow:


• Normal fuel flow is between 1500 and 410 pph (lbs per hour)
Engine Fuel Flow Indicators
APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature): (x100 lbs/hour)
• Normal operation between 200 and 715 deg C Engine Oil Pressure Indicator (PSI)
• Maximum at engine start for two seconds is 760 deg C APU (Auxiliary Power APU EGT (Exhaust Gas
Unit) RPM (%) Temperature) Indicator (deg C)
APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) RPM:
• Normal operation at 100 %
• Maximum operation at 110 %
• Engine start minimum of 60 %

128
WARTHOG
ENGINE FIRE EMERGENCY PROCEDURE
1. An engine fire is detected when one of the T-shaped fire handles illuminate.
A-10C

2. Reduce power to affected engine and monitor if the fire light goes out.
3. Set the throttle of the affected engine to OFF (RALT+END for left engine, or RCTRL+END for right engine).
4. Pull the fire handle of the affected engine (or APU if APU fire is detected) to close its respective fuel shutoff valve.
5. Set the Fire Extinguisher Agent Discharge switch either left or right (there are two extinguisher agent bottles).
6. Keep in mind that using the fire extinguisher chemical agent may very well prevent the engine from being restarted.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Right Engine Fire


1
Handle Illuminated

129
5
WARTHOG
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE – APU-ASSISTED
5
Remember you can't start your engines via APU (Auxiliary Power Unit)
A-10C

above 18000 ft. To perform an APU-assisted engine restart:


8a
1. Move the inoperative engine throttle to the OFF position.
2. Observe that the shut down engine ITT value cools down rapidly.
3. Aircraft altitude should be below 20,000 ft MSL and increase airspeed.
4. When below 15,000 ft MSL, move the APU power switch to the START
position. Wait until APU RPM reaches 100 %.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

5. Move the still operating throttle to MAX.


6. Set the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to the MOTOR
setting (AFT).
7. When affected engine ITT is below 100 °C and altitude below 15,000 ft
MSL, restart the affected engine by moving the throttle from OFF to 4
IDLE (RALT+HOME for left engine, or RCTRL+HOME for right engine). 6
8. Engine dry motoring will start (core speed will increase to 20-30%). To
allow engine ignition and fuel flow, move the Engine Operate switch of
the affected engine back to the NORM position.
9. If engine restart is successful, reengage the SAS switches and set engine 8b
operate switch back to NORM. 1

2 7

8c

130
WARTHOG
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE – WINDMILLING
A “windmilling” engine start is an engine start performed with air flow driving the
A-10C

engine compressor blades. Using a windmill start will take 6,000 to 8,000 ft to
complete because it requires a steep dive of at least 30-degrees. Given the altitude
requirement, this is not an option when below 10,000 ft AGL. To perform a windmill
engine restart:

1. Place the aircraft in a 30-degree dive to maximize airspeed during the dive.
2. Set the Bleed Air switch to OFF.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

3. Set the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED. This will link the two fuel systems and
allow boost pumps to feed both engines.
4. Once ITT of affected engine is below 150 °C, set both throttles to MAX.
5. Set and hold the Engine Operate switch of the affected engine to IGN until engine 5b
ignition occurs.
6. Once engine is operating, move Engine Operate switch back to NORM. 4 5a
7. Move Crossfeed switch to OFF.
8. Set Bleed Air switch to ON.

Right Engine Shut Down

3
131
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The fuel storage system for the A-10C consists of left and right internal wing tanks and right and left fuselage tanks. The right side fuel tanks feed the right engine and the left
A-10C

side tanks feed the left engine and APU. To provide fuel pressure, each tank has a co-located boost pump. Due to differing boost pump pressures, the wing tanks will
automatically empty before the fuselage tanks. Wing and Fuselage tanks are self-sealing and filled with a flexible foam to prevent a fuel tank explosion.

For negative G flight, the A-10C has collector tanks that will supply the engines with sufficient fuel for 10 seconds of operation at MAX power. If you fly at negative G for more
than 10 seconds, you risk the engines shutting down due to lack of fuel supply.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Fuselage (Main) Fuel Tanks


Internal Tank Capacity: Left Main: 3475 lbs (510 gal)
11087 lbs (1630 gal) Right Main: 3475 lbs (510 gal)
Left Fuel System Right Fuel System
Quantity Indicator Quantity Indicator
(x1000 lbs) (x1000 lbs)

Wing Fuel Tank


Left Wing: 2115 lbs (310 gal)

Total Fuel Quantity Indicator


(x1000 lbs)

Wing Fuel Tank


Right Wing: 2115 lbs (310 gal)
Fuel Quantity Display Selector 132Test Switch
Fuel Indicator
Internal/Main/Wing/External Wing/External Centerline
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Additionally, the aircraft can be loaded with up to three 600 gallon external fuel tanks (TK600 external store). Fuel readings on
A-10C

external tanks require the FUEL DISPLAY SEL switch to be set to either EXT WING or EXT CTR depending on where the fuel tanks
are installed.

The TK600 external fuel tanks can be carried on stations 4, 6 and 8. The fuel tank is unarmored and has no self-sealing capability.
As such, this fuel tank is only carried during ferry missions and is never flown with in combat.

To jettison external tanks, see the “Jettison Ordnance” tutorial sub-section in the Weapons section.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

TK600 External Fuel Tanks


(4080 lbs / 600 gal each)
Fuel Quantity Display Selector
Internal/Main/Wing/External Wing/External Centerline
133
WARTHOG
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW Signal Amplifier Switch
(not functional)
Fuselage EXT TKS Switch
Transfer fuel from external fuselage tank
A-10C

Exterior Lighting Brightness Control Knob


Used to help during aerial refueling
Wing EXT TKS Switch
Transfers fuel from external wing tanks
Fuel Line Check Button
Fuel Crossfeed Switch (not functional)
Although the A-10C fuel system is designed with two parallel fuel
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

systems, setting the Crossfeed switch to CROSSFEED will link the two
fuel systems and allow the boost pumps to feed both engines. If the
Crossfeed switch is set to OFF, both fuel systems are isolated. You
would most often use Crossfeed when one of the boost pumps fails.

Internal Fuel Tank Gate Open/Close Air Refueling Door Control Lever
Linking the left and right main fuel tanks is a transfer valve that may be Open/close refueling port slipway door
opened by setting the TK GATE switch to the OPEN position. Setting this
switch to CLOSE will isolate the two tanks from each other. Generally you
will want to keep this switch disabled as being enabled can lead to fuel
center of gravity problems

Wing Fuel Tank Boost


Fill Wing Fuel Tank Disable
Pump Switches To disable the filling of the wing internal tanks (due to
battle damage for instance), you can elect to disable
filling of a selected tank. These switches act like circuit
Main Fuel Tank Boost
breakers in that when you select them they are pulled
Pump Switches out and the selected tank will be disabled for refill

Fill Main Fuel Tank Disable


To disable the filling of main internal tanks (due to battle damage for
instance), you can elect to disable filling of a selected tank. These
switches act like circuit breakers in that when you select them they are
pulled out and the selected tank will be disabled for refill

134
THE MYSTERY OF THE HUD AND MULTI-FUNCTION COLOR DISPLAYS
WARTHOG

The MFCDs (Multifunction Color Display) often seem to confuse new pilots. It is hard to go from a prop plane to an aircraft that works just like a
A-10C

computer, isn’t it? So many different programs, so many switches, so many settings… It is easy to feel at loss when you have no idea what is under the
hood.

The trick in understanding how the HUD and MFCDs work is to think of them like computer monitors. In fact, it works almost exactly like a computer.
While you are having Google Chrome, Itunes, Word and other programs running simultaneously on a single screen, you can switch between different
windows, right? Well, this time you’re flying an A-10C, not a PC or a Mac. The TAD, TGP, MAV, CDU and DSMS are all different systems that can run at
the same time (just like the computer programs and apps a la Candy Crush that you use in your everyday life). The MFCDs can only “display” two
system interfaces at once, though… it kind of makes sense since you only have two screens, doesn’t it? Just like in a computer, you can choose what
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS

you want to show on any screen.


A computer screen is pretty, but it is useless if you
cannot use it. This is why you have a mouse and
keyboard. However, the A-10C does not have a
mouse and keyboard: instead, it has sets of grey
OSBs (Option Select Button) around each MFCD, a
UFC (Up Front Controller) on your front dash,
another keyboard next to your CDU (Control
Display Unit) on the right console and it has a
HOTAS (Hand On Throttle-and-Stick), which are the
fancy buttons on your joystick and throttle.

With the HOTAS, UFC, CDU keyboard and OSBs,


you can easily control your systems. It’s like having
an old Nintendo 64 controller: if you want to play,
you need to know how to use it properly.

135
THE MYSTERY OF THE HUD AND MULTI-FUNCTION COLOR DISPLAYS
WARTHOG
A-10C

SCREENS
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS

SCREEN

CONTROLLER

CONTROLLERS
136
HOTAS: HOW TO USE IT
WARTHOG
The philosophy of concept of “Hands on Throttle-and-Stick” (HOTAS) is that you can
access the majority of your systems by keeping on hands on your throttle and your
A-10C

joystick 99 % of the time.

These controls are ESSENTIAL to remember!

• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System


• Typically used to lock on targets and set your SPI…
• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch
• Used to zoom in/out, cycle through waypoints or weapons…
• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS

• COOLIE HAT
• Controls DSMS (what weapons you want to use), swaps MFCD screens (like
an ALT+TAB), lets you pick a Sensor of Interest (SOI), etc…
• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• CHINA HAT
• Set different FOV (field of view) angles and slave all sensors to your SPI
(your cameras and missiles will be looking at where you tell them to look,
like a target)

Based on what sensor is selected (SOI), these switches will do different things.

Not only do these switches do different things based on your Sensor of Interest, but
they also do different things based on how long you hold the switch.

For example, TMS UP LONG means that you press the TMS switch UP for 1 to 3
seconds. DMS RIGHT SHORT means that you press the DMS switch RIGHT for a very
short duration of time (less than 1 second), or like a simple button press.

137
A-10C
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS WARTHOG

138
A-10C
PART 8 – UNDERSTANDING HOTAS WARTHOG

139
WARTHOG
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Sensors
A-10C

• Introduction to Sensors
• Sensors Display Selection (SOI, SPI)
• HUD (Heads-Up Display) & TDC
• TISL (Target Identification Set, Laser)

• 2 - AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod


• Introduction
• Displays
• Controls
• Start-Up & Lasing Procedure
• Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode
• Laser Pointer/Marker

• 3 - AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile


PART 9 – SENSORS

• Displays
• Controls

140
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
The A-10C Warthog is by definition one of the most versatile aircraft when it comes to armament and sensors. Here is an overview of how the Warthog can “see” the
A-10C

outside world.

• AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod: Targeting system developed to provide precision strike capability. Target designation is achieved by using a laser designator/range
finder or an infrared laser marker, which can be created by the pod itself. It is also capable of displaying a FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) thermal imagery.

• AMG-65 IR Maverick Seeker Head feed: Maverick air-to-ground missiles have seeker heads that have video capability and that can be used as supplemental sensors.
PART 9 – SENSORS

LITENING Targeting Pod AGM-65


Maverick
141
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
This section will introduce you to various sensors. You will get the « what », but the « how » will be demonstrated later in the Weapons section since the use and application
A-10C

of sensors will make more sense to you once you start using them for a specific purpose. Just keep in mind that your sensors can be monitored from the HUD (Heads-Up
Display) and various displays, while they can be operated from the HOTAS stick and throttle.

DMS (Data
Management Switch)
HUD (Heads-Up Display)
TMS (Target Management
System) Switch
TGP (Targeting Pod) Page
MAV (Maverick) Page
PART 9 – SENSORS

Boat Switch

Slew Control Switch


China Hat Switch
142
Coolie Hat Switch
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
For You will hear these terms all the time: SOI, which means “Sensor of Interest” and SPI, which means
A-10C

“Sensor Point of Interest”.

The A-10C can “see” in many ways: you can look through the canopy, but you can also use different sensors like
the TGP (Targeting Pod), the MAV (Maverick Air-to-Ground missile), the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) or
even the HUD (Heads Up Display). They are all different sensors that can be controlled with the different
“controls” we spoke about earlier... like the HOTAS. Making a sensor SOI basically means that you take control
of this sensor. In “computer terms”, it is the equivalent of using Alt-Tab to select which window you want to
use your mouse and keyboard in. If you want to control the infrared camera embedded in your TGP, you need
to select the TGP by “making it your SOI”.
HUD SOI Asterisk
A SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), on the other hand, is
where your SOI (the Sensor of Interest that you are SPI Sensor Indicator
currently controlling) is pointing. It is basically your TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
mouse’s cursor. In other words, you use a SPI to lock on
targets and throw shit at it that blows up. In order to use a
weapon, the procedure is always the same: choose a NOT SOI Indicates that this page
Sensor of Interest (SOI) like your TGP, your HUD or a is not the Sensor of Interest
MAVerick Missile’s seeker head, and once you have made
this sensor your SOI, control your SPI (camera “cursor”),
move it on a target, slave your sensors to this SPI, lock
PART 9 – SENSORS

your target and fire your weapons according to the


procedures elaborated in the WEAPONS part of this guide.

Green Square: TGP Page is


SOI (Sensor of Interest)

143
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
The Coolie Hat Switch is used to determine a SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C

As an example, if we have the TGP page on the left MFCD and the Maverick Page on the right MFCD and we
want to set the TGP page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI):
• Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (LEFT since we
have the TGP page on the left MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).

To set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI, press the Coolie Hat Switch UP.

Coolie Hat Switch


PART 9 – SENSORS

Green Square: TGP Page is


SOI (Sensor of Interest)

144
1 – SENSORS TMS (Target Management System) Switch
WARTHOG SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
The Target Management Switch (TMS) is used to create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) based on
A-10C

what sensor is the Sensor of Interest.


The China Hat Switch is used to slave sensors like the Targeting Pod to the SPI.

• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System


• FWD LONG: Creates SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT LONG: SPI set to Steerpoint

• CHINA HAT
• FWD LONG: Slaves all sensors to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT LONG: Slaves TGP to Steerpoint
China Hat Switch
Green Square: TGP Page is
SOI (Sensor of Interest)
PART 9 – SENSORS

SPI Sensor Indicator 145


TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
Example 1: Targeting Pod (TGP) is the Sensor of Interest, SPI has been defined on the TGP.
A-10C

MAV Page
HUD (Heads-Up Display)

Green Square: TGP Page is


SOI (Sensor of Interest)

TGP is SPI
PART 9 – SENSORS

SPI (Sensor point of Interest)

Targeting pod SPI (Sensor


Point of Interest)
Targeting Pod
(Sensor of Interest/SOI)

146
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION (SOI, SPI)
Example 2: Targeting Pod (TGP) is the Sensor of Interest, SPI has been defined on the TGP.
A-10C

All sensors have been slaved with the China Hat Switch FWD LONG.
MAV Page
HUD (Heads-Up Display)

Green Square: TGP Page is


SOI (Sensor of Interest)

Targeting Pod
(Sensor of Interest/SOI) TGP is SPI
PART 9 – SENSORS

SPI (Sensor point of Interest)

Targeting pod SPI (Sensor


Point of Interest)

China Hat Switch 147


1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG HUD (HEADS-UP DISPLAY) & TDC
TVV (Total Velocity NAV Master Mode
When the Heads-Up Display is in NAV mode (mode can be cycled with the Vector)
A-10C

Master Mode Switch) and the HUD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SPI) with the
Coolie Hat Switch UP, you can use a TDC (Target Designation Cue) to designate a
target. Ground Stabilized TDC
(Target Designation Cue)
The TDC is always displayed when the HUD is the Sensor of Interest (SOI).

Initially, the TDC will appear caged within the Total Velocity Vector (TVV). The HUD is the Sensor of
TDC can then be slewed to any location within the HUD Field of View (FOV). Interest (SOI)
When slew switch is released, the TDC will attempt to compute a position on
the ground (latitude, longitude and elevation). If successful, the TDC will ground
stabilize on that point. If unsuccessful (location > 13nm away), an “X” will be
drawn over the TDC and the TDC will be HUD stabilized with an “X” indicating an
invalid designation. In this condition, the TDC cannot become the Sensor Point
of Interest (SPI).
TDC is the Sensor Point
Even if the HUD is not SOI, commanding slave to SPI will slave the TDC to the
of Interest (SPI)
position of the current SPI. The TDC remains slaved until the SPI changes or until
the HUD becomes SOI and the Slew Control switch is used to move the TDC.

When the position designated by a ground stabilized TDC is outside the HUD
PART 9 – SENSORS

FOV, but within 60 degrees of the aircraft nose, the TDC symbol is clamped to
the HUD FOV on the appropriate side of the HUD. If the position is outside the
HUD FOV and outside of 60 degrees of the aircraft nose, the TDC is clamped to
the HUD FOV and horizontally stabilized to the TVV.
Master Mode Button

148
1 – SENSORS
TMS (Target Management System) Switch
WARTHOG HUD (HEADS-UP DISPLAY) & TDC
5
To designate a target with the HUD & TDC:
A-10C

1. Press Master Mode Switch to toggle modes until NAV mode is selected.
2. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest)
3. By default, the TDC (Target Designation Cue) is caged on the Total Velocity Vector (TVV).
4. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TDC to the desired target location.
1
5. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to make the current TDC
location the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). Master Mode Button
6. If you want to reset SPI, press the TMS Switch AFT LONG. Keep in mind that the TDC will remain
ground stabilized at its current location. 2
China Hat Switch
7. If you want to recage the TDC to the TVV, press China Hat switch AFT SHORT. Coolie Hat Switch 4

TDC (Target Designation Cue) Caged Slew Control Switch


in TVV (Total Velocity Vector) TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
Tadpole (direction to SPI)
3

TDC is the SPI


4
1 TDC (Target
Designation Cue)
PART 9 – SENSORS

2 HUD is SOI

TDC is the SPI

149
1 – SENSORS
TMS (Target Management System) Switch
WARTHOG HUD (HEADS-UP DISPLAY) & TDC
These controls work if the HUD is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch UP.
A-10C

• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System


• FWD SHORT: Commands TDC ground stabilize attempt
• FWD LONG: Creates SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT LONG: SPI reset to Steerpoint location. TDC remains ground stabilized at its current location.
• RIGHT: Sets Markpoint

• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your TDC is designating
China Hat Switch
• COOLIE HAT Coolie Hat Switch
• UP: Selects HUD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)
Slew Control Switch
• CHINA HAT
• AFT SHORT: Recages TDC to the TVV (Total Velocity Vector)

TVV
PART 9 – SENSORS

TDC

TDC is the SPI

150
1 – SENSORS
WARTHOG TISL (TARGET IDENTIFICATION SET, LASER) / PAVE PENNY POD
The Target Identification Set, Laser (TISL) system detects and tracks reflected laser energy. TISL
A-10C

does NOT emit any laser energy; it is a passive-only system. The TISL can be used to locate targets
being laser designated by another asset such as another aircraft or ground forces.

NOTE: This panel is not functionally implemented in this simulation. With the A-10C, all laser spot
detection is done with the targeting pod in LSS/LST modes.

AAS-35 “Pave Penny” Laser Marked Target Receiver Pod


PART 9 – SENSORS

The Pave Penny laser sensor (marked target seeker) pod that allowed the pilot to
detect laser energy for PID (Positive Identification) of an illuminated target. The Pave
Penny is a passive seeker and cannot self-designate a target for a Laser Guided
Bomb (LGB). Pave Penny control is done through the Target Identification Set, Laser
(TISL) panel in the cockpit. Although Pave Penny functions have largely been
replaced in modern A-10s by the targeting pod, the system and capability remain.

151
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG INTRODUCTION
The AN/AAQ-28 LITENING system is a self-contained, multi-sensor targeting and surveillance system. The LITENING enables aircrews to detect, acquire, auto-track
A-10C

and identify targets at long ranges for weapon delivery or non-traditional intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance missions. LITENING's FLIR, charged-coupled
device (CCD), laser imaging sensors, advanced image processing and digital video output provide useful imagery of targets on the ground, allowing aircrews to
identify and engage targets under a wide range of battlefield conditions.
PART 9 – SENSORS

152
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
The targeting pod feed can be displayed on either MFCD (Multi-Function Color Display). To display targeting pod feed, select TGP page and its desired mode (A-G in our case)
A-10C

Targeting Pod Air-to- Targeting Pod Standby Targeting Pod Air-to-


Ground Mode Selector Mode Selector Air Mode Selector Test Display
TV/FLIR Camera Mode
CNTL (A-G Control Setting) CCD: Charge Coupled Device (TV)
Page Selector WHOT: White Hot Infrared
BHOT: Black Hot Infrared

Field-of-View Setting
WIDE/NARROW
LSS (Laser Spot Search) &
LST (Laser Spot Track) Activation

Laser Designator Mode


Gain & Level Schedule LSR: Laser
Controls (based on selector) IR: Infrared Pointer/Marker
BTH: Both LSR & IR simultaneously
Gain & Level Schedule
Control Selector Yardstick: Relative ground distance
covered by the right half of the crosshair
TGP SOI (Sensor of Interest) Indication Targeting Pod Crosshair/Reticle
PART 9 – SENSORS

Track Mode Laser Slant Range Finder (nm)


AREA: Area Track
POINT: Point Track Laser Source
INR-A: Inertial Area (masked) Clock Zulu L: Laser is Active
INR-P: Inertial Point (masked) Time T: Laser is Tracking a Target
INR: Inertial E: Laser is slewing
TGP Reticle Coordinates Laser Status (based on AHCP Switches)
T: Training Selected
P: IR Pointer Armed
L: Laser Armed
TGP Page Selector Laser (LSR) Code B: Both Laser & IR Pointer Armed 153
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod CNTL (A-G Control Setting)
Page Selector
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
You can access the CNTL (Air-to-Ground Mode Control) page by pressing the OSB next to CNTL.
A-10C

RTN (Returns to TGP Page)

TGP Attitude Advisory


Function (TAAF)
Focus Reset
FRND (Displays Friendly
Units, shown as a Green X) Coordinate Display
LL: Latitude/Longitude
MGRS: Military Grid Reference System
Laser Illumination Code OFF: No coordinates displayed

Laser Latch Function


Laser Spot Search (LSS) Code ON/OFF
PART 9 – SENSORS

Yardstick Unit System


Metric/USA/OFF

FLIR Integration Setting Gain Control Setting


INT HOT / INT COLD MGC: Manual
AGC: Automatic

154
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
The Targeting Pod View Relative Direction symbol on the FLIR display can give you a good idea of where the pod is pointing in relationship to your aircraft. This view direction
A-10C

is represented in a top-down view.

Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting


Pod View Relative Direction)
Targeting Pod is looking here

Arrow indicates direction towards North


relative to the TGP's display orientation
PART 9 – SENSORS

155
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
The Targeting Pod also displays data on the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and TAD (Tactical Awareness Display)
A-10C

Laser Status
• L: Laser Designation
• P: IR Pointer Designation
• B: Laser and IR Pointer (BOTH) used simultaneously
• M: Target Masked by Aircraft

TAD TGP SPI Diamond (Sensors Not Slaved)

TGP SPI (All


Sensors Slaved)
PART 9 – SENSORS

TGP SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) Designated by TGP 156


2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
You can also access the A-A (Air-to-Air) Targeting Pod Mode to designate air targets.
A-10C

Targeting Pod Air-to-Air Mode Selector

Laser Mode
CMBT: Combat
TRNG: Training
PART 9 – SENSORS

157
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod TMS (Target Management System) Switch
WARTHOG CONTROLS
These controls work if the TGP Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch.
A-10C

• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System


• FWD SHORT: Point Track/Area Track Toggle
• FWD LONG: Creates SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT SHORT: INR Track
• AFT LONG: SPI set to Steerpoint
• LEFT: Reset WCN (Warning, Caution & Notes)
• RIGHT: Sets Markpoint

• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch


• FWD/AFT SHORT: Increases/Decreases Zoom Level
• RIGHT SHORT: Laser Designator Toggle (LSR, IR, BOTH) Nosewheel Steering Button
DMS (Data Management Switch)
• RIGHT LONG: LSS (Laser Spot Search) Toggle

• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Targeting Pod / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking

• COOLIE HAT
• LEFT/RIGHT LONG: Selects MFCD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)

• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different TV or FLIR (forward looking infrared) camera modes
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
PART 9 – SENSORS

• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)


• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)

• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: Field-of-View Wide/Narrow Toggle
• FWD LONG: Slaves all sensors to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
Boat Switch
• AFT SHORT: Boresight TGP
• AFT LONG: Slaves TGP to Steerpoint

• NOSEWHEEL STEERING BUTTON


China Hat Switch
Slew Control Switch
• Used to fire laser
158
Coolie Hat Switch
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
1. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display
A-10C

the TGP Feed Page.


2. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to
power up the targeting pod. 3b
3. A 2-minute warm-up period is required. TGP Display will start from TGP 3a
OFF, then transition to NOT TIMED OUT during the warm-up process.
4. Once targeting pod warm-up sequence is complete, the NOT TIMED OUT
indication will disappear.
5. Set MASTER ARM and LASER ARM switches to ARM.

4
3c
PART 9 – SENSORS

1b

159
1a
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE 6

6. Select AG (Air-to-Ground) TGP Mode by pressing the OSB


A-10C

next to AG.
7. When the TGP goes from STBY mode to AG mode, this will
un-stow the camera. Confirm that Targeting Pod mode
switches from STBY to AG.
8. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the
MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have
the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as 7
the SOI (Sensor of Interest).

8b Coolie Hat Switch

6
PART 9 – SENSORS

8c
8a
TGP is SOI

160
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
9. Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
A-10C

• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)


• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV) 13
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
10. Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
11. Select desired Laser Designator Mode (LSR) with OSB.
12. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter see the TGP AG Control Page.
13. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will
choose the default laser code 1688. 9 Boat Switch 7
14. Press on the OSB next to “L” (Laser Designation Code) to enter
laser code 1688. 10 China Hat Switch Slew Control Switch
15. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser
is latched once fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button).
12b
We will choose LATCH OFF.
16. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page.
12a 16
PART 9 – SENSORS

14
15

11

161
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
17. Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the
A-10C

TGP reticle on the target.


• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you
(boresight), press the China Hat Switch AFT SHORT.
18. Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT
to adjust Zoom Level.
19. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD
SHORT to track the target. This will toggle tracking modes
between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target). 17
20. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG
to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). Slew Control Switch 19 / 20 18
21. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to 21 China Hat Switch TMS Switch DMS Switch 22b
the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
22. Press and hold Nosewheel Steering Button Nosewheel Steering Button
(“Insert” binding) to fire laser.

TGP Reticle
PART 9 – SENSORS

20 19
22a 22c Laser is Firing
162
TGP Sensor Point of Interest Designated
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
• Note: Once all sensors are slaved to the TGP Target Track, the Heads-Up Display and TAD (Tactical Awareness
A-10C

Display) will also display information about where the targeting pod is looking.

TAD TGP SPI Diamond (Sensors Not Slaved)

Laser is Firing

TGP SPI (All


PART 9 – SENSORS

Sensors Slaved)

TGP SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

Laser is Firing
163
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode 1

The targeting pod can also spot and track a laser from someone else (a friendly A-10 lasing his own
A-10C

target, or a JTAC, Joint Tactical Air Controller, calling an air strike). To track another laser:
1. Find out what the laser code used by the friendly is (in our case, the friendly JTAC uses code
1688). Make sure the friendly asset is lasing the target before attempting to track it.
2. Power up the Targeting Pod, select TGP page and set A-G TGP Mode as per the previous Power-Up
Procedure.
3. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT
since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest).
4. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter see the TGP AG Control Page.
5. Enter the desired Laser Code to be searched on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose the default
2a 5
laser code 1688.
6. Press on the OSB next to “LSS” (Laser Spot Search Code) to enter LSS code 1688.
7. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page.

7
4

2c
PART 9 – SENSORS

6
3

Coolie Hat Switch 164


2b
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode
8. Slew the targeting pod using the Sensor Select Switch and TDC
A-10C

controls within the vicinity of the JTAC location. If the targeting


pod is looking too far from the laser, it will not be able to find the
laser. 10
9. Press the OSB next to “LSS” (Laser Spot Search). Alternatively, you
can also use the DMS (Data Management Switch) RIGHT LONG as
a shortcut.
10. When the LSS operation starts, the TGP will be searching for a
9a
laser designation to track. “LSRCH” will be displayed in the lower
center of the display. The Situational Awareness Cue will indicate DMS Switch
where the pod is scanning.
Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting Pod View Relative Direction)

9a

9b
PART 9 – SENSORS

10

Slew Control Switch

165
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod 13 13
WARTHOG LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode
11. When the TGP has detected a laser energy reflection, “DETECT”
A-10C

will replace “LSRCH” on the display, and the OSB label will change
from “LSS” to “LST” to indicate Laser Spot Track. The TGP line of
sight will then automatically slew to the detected laser reflection.
12. After 1 second, “DETECT” will be replaced with “LTRACK” and a
box (container) measuring the size of the tracking gate will overlay
TGP Diamond
the laser energy spot.
(HUD)
13. On the HUD, the TGP diamond will mark the position of the Laser
Spot Track (LST). The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) will also
display the LST.
14. To exit LSS/LST mode, press OSB next to LSS. TAD LST

14
Friendly JTAC

Laser Spot (Target)


PART 9 – SENSORS

11b 12
11a

166
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG LASER SPOT SEARCH (LSS) Mode
a
When working with a JTAC (Joint Tactical Air Controller), a “9-line”
A-10C

transmission is sent to you. Basically, it is a set of commands and


information that is used to guide you to the target. You will likely
see a “NEW TASKING” message sent to you.

a) NEW TASKING indication means a message has been sent to


you from the JTAC.
b) To read 9-line message, select the MSG page.
c) Press OSB next to ACK (Acknowledge) to remove the white
“NEW TASKING” message indication. Alternatively you can also
clear the note with a TMS Left Short press.
d) You can return to the TGP page.

b
PART 9 – SENSORS

d c 167
b
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG LASER POINTER/MARKER
The targeting pod can also use a laser marker (the laser marker cannot be tracked by air-to-ground weapons), which is an infrared laser that can
A-10C

only be seen with night vision goggles (RSHIFT+H to toggle NVGs). This is used mainly to provide a visual reference to other aircraft on where a
target is.
1. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
2. Set Master ARM and LASER ARM switches to ARM.
3. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right
MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
4. Select Laser Designator Mode to IR (Infrared) with OSB.
5. Slew TGP reticle as shown previously on desired target.
6. Press and hold Nosewheel Steering Button Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert binding”) to fire laser. “P” (Infrared Pointer) indication will
6
flash while pointer is firing.
Nosewheel Steering Button
1

Laser Pointer is Firing 6


PART 9 – SENSORS

4 Coolie Hat Switch 3


3

Laser Pointer is Firing 6


168
1
2 – AN/AAQ-28 LITENING Targeting Pod
WARTHOG LASER POINTER/MARKER
I strongly suggest that you adjust your HUD Brightness with the INTEN rocker switch on the Up-Front Control if you
A-10C

want to be able to see the IR marking laser.

HUD Brightness Rocker


Switch
PART 9 – SENSORS

Laser Marker

Laser Marker

169
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 9 – SENSORS

Maverick Missile
170
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight
A-10C

Maverick Release Maverick Seeker Center


Profile Name

Active Maverick EO (Electro-Optical) Function


Station Number Powers on Maverick missile station

Adjustment Boresight Function


Adjusts boresight position of the Maverick.
Slew the Maverick to the desired boresight
position, and press the OSB next to ADJ OFF.
With ADJ ON, the next time you cage the
missile to boresight, it will automatically cage
to the set position.
Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ) Maverick Slew Rate Data Field

5 deg Maverick Depression Marker


PART 9 – SENSORS

10 deg Maverick Depression Marker

15 deg Maverick Depression Marker

Maverick EO (Electro-
Optical) Power Timer

Maverick (MAV) Page 171


3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
A-10C

Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
PART 9 – SENSORS

172
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG DISPLAYS
Maverick Data is also visible on the Heads-Up Display.
A-10C

Maverick Upper Tick Mark


Tick mark at the top of the DLZ staple represents the
Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm.

Maverick Reticle

Maverick DLZ (Dynamic


Launch Zone) Range Staple

Maverick Line of
PART 9 – SENSORS

Target Range Caret Sight Range (nm)


and Numeric (nm)

Maverick Lower Tick Mark


Tick mark at the bottom of the DLZ
staple represents the Maverick’s
minimum range. Maverick Release
Profile Name
SPI Sensor Indicator
Missile Time of Flight (sec) MAV: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Maverick 173
3 – AGM-65 Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile
WARTHOG CONTROLS TMS (Target Management System) Switch
These controls work if the MAV Page is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
A-10C

and the Maverick missile is selected from the DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page.

• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System


• FWD SHORT: Missile Track
• FWD LONG: Creates SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• AFT SHORT: Ground Stabilize
• AFT LONG: SPI set to Steerpoint
• LEFT SHORT: Reset WCN (Warning, Caution & Notes)
• LEFT LONG: Space Stabilize
• RIGHT: Sets Markpoint

• DMS SWITCH: Data Management Switch


• FWD/AFT/LEFT/RIGHT: Maverick Reticle UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT DMS (Data Management Switch) AGM-65D Maverick Selected

• SLEW CONTROL
• Used to control where your Maverick / Sensor of Interest (SOI) is looking

• COOLIE HAT
• LEFT/RIGHT LONG: Selects MFCD as SOI (Sensor of Interest)

• BOAT SWITCH
• Cycle through different Maverick modes
• FWD: Black Symbols
PART 9 – SENSORS

• MIDDLE: Force Correlate / AUTO


• AFT: White Symbols

• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: Field-of-View Wide/Narrow Toggle
• FWD LONG: Slaves all sensors to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
Boat Switch
• AFT SHORT: Maverick Missile Step (selects other missile) / Resets missile to boresight position

China Hat Switch


Slew Control Switch

Coolie Hat Switch 174


WARTHOG
SECTION STRUCTURE

• 1 - Introduction • 3 – Air-to-Air Weapons


A-10C

• 1.1 – Introduction to Weapons • 3.1 – GAU-8 Gun (Air-to-Air)


• 1.2 – My Weapons Control Setup • 3.2 – AIM-9 Sidewinder
• 1.3 – DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) Page
• 1.4 – Re-Arming Considerations • 4 – Ordnance Jettison
• 1.5 – Master Modes • 4.1 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• 1.6 – Bomb Delivery Modes • 4.2 – Emergency Stores Jettison


• 1.7 – Procedures Summary

• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
• 2.1 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82 Low Drag – CCIP)
• 2.1.1 – Manual CCIP Release Mode
• 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR Release Mode
• 2.2 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82AIR High Drag – CCRP)
• 2.3 – Rockets (CCIP)
• 2.4 – GAU-8 Gun (Air-to-Ground)
• 2.4.1 – Introduction
• 2.4.2 – CCIP Reticle
• 2.4.3 – CCIP Cross
• 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 Reticle
• 2.4.5 – 4000 Ft Wind Corrected Cross
• 2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM (JTAC Coordinates)
• 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (Targeting Pod)
• 2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD (CCRP + Targeting Pod)
• 2.8 – GBU-12 Paveway II (Laser-Guided)
• 2.9 – AGM-65 Infrared Maverick (MAV Sensor)
• 2.10 – AGM-65 Infrared Maverick (Targeting Pod)
175
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS
WARTHOG
The A-10C can use a HUGE variety of weapons.
A-10C

A good loadout is not necessarily the biggest bomb: a good loadout is the one that you know
how to use and are most comfortable with… and yet that remains flexible enough to allow you
to adapt to different targets and situations.

There is a mindblowing selection of ordnance to pick from and it is easy to feel lost by the
sheer number of different bombs. We will briefly explore the types of bombs together to help
you understand what they are all about.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• Unguided rockets
• GAU-8/A 30 mm Gun
• Air-to-Ground Missile
• Ex: AGM-65 MAVERICK (AGM = Air-to-Ground Missile)
• Air-to-Air Infrared Seeking Missile
• AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
• Unguided bombs
• Ex: Mk-82, Mk-82AIR, Mk-84
• PGM: Precision Guided Munition
• LGB: Laser-Guided Bombs / GBU (Guided Bomb Unit)
• Bomb is guided by a laser beam from operators on the ground, a JTAC or your
own TGP (targeting pod).
• Ex: GBU-10, GBU-12
• IAM: Inertially Aided Munition
• JDAM (Joint Directed Attack Munition)
• Bomb is guided by a GPS satellite. Fire & Forget.
• Ex: GBU-38, GBU-31
• WCMD (Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser)
• Guided by INS (Inertial Navigation System) . Fire & Forget.
• Ex: CBU-87, CBU-97, CBU-105

176
1.2 – MY WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP
WARTHOG
The A-10C weapon systems are controlled pretty much exclusively with the stick and throttle. This gives you tremendous functionality at your fingertips.
A-10C

Each function of these controls will change based on what sensor is selected as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) and what Master Mode is selected.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Weapon Release Button

Master Mode Button

Gun Trigger
(2-stage detent) Boat Switch

China Hat Switch


Slew Control Switch
DMS (Data Management Switch)
Coolie Hat Switch

Nosewheel Steering Button TMS (Target Management System) Switch

177
1.2 – MY WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP
WARTHOG
Here is a summary of control functions based on SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

178
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE
WARTHOG
The DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) replaces the old A-10A Armament Control Panel (ACP). All of the settings for weapons, release parameters, and control of
the various types of armament are now handled using the DSMS pages on an MFCD.
A-10C

The DSMS provides you with an overall display of weapons status, inventory of each station on the aircraft, which stations are selected, the arm state, status of the GAU-8
gun, and what profile is currently selected for each weapon.

The DSMS also contains a separate page that provides you the ability to view, select, and control profiles and delivery parameters such as interval and ripple settings for
appropriate weapon types. Each of these combinations is called a profile. These weapon profiles can either be selected from the DSMS page or selected as a rotary HUD
selection from the HOTAS. The DSMS provides selective jettison options and parameters for each weapon, rack, launcher, or station. DSMS also has a set of pages used to
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

control settings mode, power, and boresighting functions for AGM-65 and AIM-9 missiles.

Station 11
2 x AIM-9 Missiles
Station 9 Station 8
3 x MK82AIR Bombs CBU-105

Station 5
CBU-97

Station 4
MK-82 Bomb

Station 10
LITENING Station 3
Targeting Pod 2 x AGM-65H Maverick

Station 1
Station 7 Station 6 Station 2 179
ALQ-131 ECM Pod
GBU-38 JDAM TK600 Fuel Tank 7 x M-156 Rockets
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE
WARTHOG
The DSMS is accessed by pressing the lower OSB (Option Select Button) next to DSMS. The DSMS is divided in the following sub-pages:
• Status Page
A-10C

• Profile Main Page


• Profile Control Page
• Profile Settings Page
• Inventory Main Page
• Inventory Select Page
• Inventory Class Page
• Inventory Store Type Page
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• Inventory Store Select


• Selective Jettison Page DSMS
STATUS Page
• Missile Control Page DSMS
INVENTORY SELECT Page

DSMS Page Select OSB

DSMS
DSMS
MISSILE CONTROL Page
SELECTIVE JETTISON Page

180
1.3 – DSMS (DIGITAL STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE Store Type Quantity
WARTHOG
Color coding represents the status of the weapon.
Station Number Weapon Status
A-10C

• White: Master Arm is set to SAFE. When is SAFE mode, all systems behave as if in ARM
mode but no weapons or flares will be released. However, if Maverick is selected, no video Launcher/Config
is shown. Shown: LAU117 Rack
• Blue: Master Arm is set to TRAIN. This is a simulated mode in which “virtual” weapons can
be loaded on the aircraft. TRAIN profiles will not show any mismatch errors from what is in
Gun Arming Switch
the profile and what is detected as loaded on the aircraft.
• Green: Master Arm is set to ARM.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Master Arm Switch


• Red: A red indication means that the profile and the inventory have conflicting information
for what is loaded on the station. Additionally, the station may be red if the weapon profile
for that station has invalid settings.

Green: Weapon is selected White: Weapon is selected


Blue: Weapon is selected
and Master Arm ON and Master Arm SAFE
and Master Arm TRAIN

Gun Status, Ammunition Count & Type Gun Status, Ammunition Count & Type
Shown: Gun armed, 1150 rounds, combat mix Shown: Gun SAFE, 1150 rounds, combat mix 181
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY

WARTHOG
When a ground crew re-arms the A-10’s stations, the ground crew installs a new Data Transfer Cartridge (DTC)
containing all the information relevant to the ordnance you have loaded on the aircraft pylons. However, the
DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) needs to re-load the Data Cartridge in order to update the stations in
A-10C

its stations.

DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)


PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

DSMS LOADED CORRECTLY

182
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY
WARTHOG 1
Here is the procedure to re-load the DSMS correctly after the ground
crew has re-armed your aircraft.
A-10C

1. Select any page on the right MFCD


2. Click and hold “MSG” OSB until you see the DISPLAY PROGRAM
page appear
3. Click on “Load” OSB on the right menus.
4. Click on lower “MSG” OSB. OSB will replace the “MSG” page with
the “LOAD” page.
5. Click on the new lower “LOAD” OSB menu. This will select the DTS
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

UPLOAD (Data Transfer System) page.

2a

2b 3
4b
5

4a 183
1.4 – RE-ARMING CONSIDERATIONS DSMS LOADED INCORRECTLY DSMS LOADED CORRECTLY
WARTHOG
6. Click on “LOAD ALL” OSB on the right to reload all DSMS
stations.
7. While DTC loading is in process, all asterisks near menus
A-10C

being reloaded will disappear.


8. When DTC loading is complete, asterisks will appear next
to every menu and DSMS page will be available and
updated with the correct ordnance.
8
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

6
7 8
Not Loaded
Loading Loading
In Progress Complete

184
1.5 – MASTER MODES
WARTHOG
There are five master HUD (Heads-Up Display) modes that you can cycle through using the Master
Mode Control Button on the control stick.
A-10C

• NAV: Navigation data only with no weapon delivery symbology.


• GUNS: Select and display multiple gunsight options.
• CCIP: Bombing symbology for Continuously Computed Impact Point delivery including Consent
to Release (CR) modes. Maverick delivery also uses the CCIP mode.
• CCRP: Bombing symbology for Continuously Computed Release Point delivery for illumination
flares, unguided bombs, laser-guided bombs, and Inertially Aided Munitions (IAM).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• AIR-TO-AIR: Display symbology for Air-to-Air gun and AIM-9 missile.


• Air-to-Air mode can only be selected by holding the Master Mode Control Button for
about 3 seconds.

Master Mode

Master Mode

Master Mode Control


Button (MMCB)

185
1.5 – MASTER MODES
WARTHOG
A-10C

CCIP Master Mode


CCRP Master Mode
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

GUNS Master Mode

NAV Master Mode


AIR-TO-AIR Master Mode

186
1.6 – BOMB DELIVERY MODE - CCRP VS CCIP
WARTHOG
There are 2 ways to deliver bombs: CCRP or CCIP modes.

CCIP mode is the traditional dive bombing approach: you dive on target and the reticle will tell
A-10C

you where the bomb will impact.

However, dive bombing is a risky business, especially if anti-air defences are surrounding your
target. The lower you go, the more vulnerable you are. This is why CCRP release mode was
invented.

CCRP mode allows you to fly straight and level without having to dive down. The HUD will tell
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

you when to release your bomb for the target you have designated with your Targeting Pod
(TGP). It is a much safer way to release a bomb, but as you may have guessed already, it is a bit
less precise.

Using CCRP or CCIP is up to you and the situation you are in. Some pilots prefer to use CCIP,
while others would not touch CCRP with a 10-ft pole. Both delivery modes work, and only CCIP: Continuously Computed Impact Point
experience will teach you what you prefer to use, and in which situations. As shown previously,
CCRP or CCIP delivery can be set throughout the DSMS during the PREFLIGHT phase.

Your delivery mode can be set throughout your DSMS in your weapon profiles.

CCRP: Continuously Computed Release Point


187
1.7 – PROCEDURES SUMMARY
WARTHOG
These are the steps you must do in order to fire a weapon.
1. Select a weapon using your DSMS.
A-10C

2. Select weapon profile: make the HUD SOI (Sensor of Interest) with Coolie Hat Switch UP, then press the DMS
(Data Management Switch) left or right to cycle between weapon profiles.
3. Arm selected weapon and sensors
4. Select bomb delivery mode if applicable (CCIP or CCRP)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Use one of your sensors (by making it SOI) to find a target, move your SPI over your target, slave all your sensors
to the SPI/target and lock it.
6. Fire weapon when you have a firing solution.

An excellent weapons tutorial by Robert Sogomonian


https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-MDNcdFJ8x0

Note: Rob10 from the DCS forums did a couple of lists and detailed procedures on how to use each weapon type. These charts are listed at the end of this section, so I
recommend that you print them out. This is good, useful stuff.

There is also another tutorial by Sim that shows weapon employments with lots of pretty pictures.
http://simhq.com/forum/ubbthreads.php/topics/3171145/How_to_use_weapons_Picture_gui.html#Post3171145

188
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG

189
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG

190
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG

191
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG

192
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE 5

A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page 3
3. Select MK-82 Bomb (green when selected)
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

3
Selected Station

193
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
8b 9b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

5. Set CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) Mode


6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Bomb Drop
• PRS (Pairs): Bombs dropped in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will release the set 8a
number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will release the 9a
number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail)
8. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC
scratchpad (2), then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
9. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the desired distance on the
UFC scratchpad (75), then pressing the OSB next to FT.
10. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.

8c

9c
10
5

194
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
17b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

11. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in
mils) on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment).
Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.
12. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in ft) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). 17a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.


13. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10
and +30 ft/sec. 18
14. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then
press on the OSB next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40.
15. Select desired Escape Maneuver Type
• NONE: No Escape Maneuver
11
• CLB: Climbing Maneuver
15
• TRN: Turn Maneuver
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver 12
16. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired Time of Fall (in sec) of the bomb from 16
release time to impact time, enter ToF value on the UFC scratch pad, then press on 13
the OSB next to DES TOF.
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up
14
Display, enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB
next to MIN ALT. 17c
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

195
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

19. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
20. Select MK-82 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data 20
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Management Switch) left or right. DMS Switch


21. The MK-82 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
MK-82 Weapon Profile

Stations Selected

20b
20a
20d

20c

196
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

22. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by
Right Clicking on the switch. 23
23. Select CCIP CONSENT option with the SEL Rocker Key.
24
24. If CCIP CONSENT option is not in “OFF”, use the DATA rocker key to cycle between
modes until “OFF” is displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

25. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Left Clicking on the switch. The Heads-Up
Display will revert to its normal state.

25b 24 23

22

25a

197
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

26. Press the Master Mode button until the CCIP HUD Mode is selected.
27. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.
28. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, MK-82
profile and ARM status are displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

26b

HUD is SOI

28

26a
Master Mode Switch

27
Coolie Hat Switch

198
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE 33
Weapon Release Button
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

29. Perform a shallow dive between 10 and 45 deg from at least 10000 ft.
30. A dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line) will appear when you are not yet close
enough to the target (the aiming pipper is currently positioned too low to be visible on the HUD).
31. When you are close enough to the target, the CCIP Bombing Reticle will come into view from the
bottom of the HUD and the PBIL will turn from dashed to solid
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

32. Place the center of the CCIP Bombing Reticle on the target.
31
33. Press and hold the Weapon Release Button (RALT+SPACE) to release bombs.

30

Dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL Time of Fall Solid PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line)
(Projected Bomb Impact Line) (TOF, in sec)

CCIP Bombing Reticle

Target
Analog Range Indicator

199
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
A-10C

CCIP Gun Cross (Range in


nm under cross)

MRS (Minimum Range Staple)


PBIL indicates the set minimum escape range of the selected profile as
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

(Projected Bomb Impact Line) set in DSMS

Desired Release Cue


Mach Airspeed Indicator Desired time of fall as entered in the DSMS weapon profile (DES TOF)

CCIP Bomb Reticle


Time-of-Fall (TOF) Display

Release Mode
MRC (Minimum Range Caret)

Profile Name

Weapon Status Indicator

Selected Stations

Analog Range Bar


5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft

200
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.1 – MANUAL CCIP RELEASE MODE
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

201
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE 5

The Consent Release (CR) mode allows you to designate a target much as you would attack it with a CCIP
A-10C

3
Manual Release attack, and then pull up out of the attack with the target well below the HUD lower field of
view. This can be a useful delivery when you want to reduce the time you are in an attack dive and it allows you
to start your escape maneuver earlier.

There are two CR modes: 3/9 (named after the 3 o’clock and 9 o’clock positions on the reticle) and 5 MIL.
3
• If 3/9 is selected, the Solution Cue simply needs to pass through the reticle
• If 5-MIL is selected, you must maneuver the aircraft such that the solution cue passes through the pipper of
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

the reticle.

A: SELECT WEAPON

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Select MK-82 Bomb (green when selected)
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu

Image taken from Crash Laobi’s CCIP-CR Tutorial Solution Cue and TTRN (Time
to Release Numeric)

1
CCIP Reticle

3 o’clock position 3 o’clock position 202


2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
8b 9b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

5. Set CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) Mode


6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Bomb Drop
• PRS (Pairs): Bombs dropped in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will release the set 8a
number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will release the 9a
number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail)
8. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC
scratchpad (4), then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
9. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the desired distance on the
UFC scratchpad (75), then pressing the OSB next to FT.
10. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.

8c

9c

10 5

203
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
17b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

11. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in
mils) on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment).
Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.
12. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in ft) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). 17a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.


13. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10
18
and +30 ft/sec.
14. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then
press on the OSB next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40.
15. Select desired Escape Maneuver Type
• NONE: No Escape Maneuver 11
15
• CLB: Climbing Maneuver
• TRN: Turn Maneuver
12
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver
16. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired Time of Fall (in sec) of the bomb from 16
release time to impact time, enter ToF value on the UFC scratch pad, then press on 13
the OSB next to DES TOF.
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up 14
Display, enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB
next to MIN ALT. 17c
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

204
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

19. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
20. Select MK-82 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

20
Management Switch) left or right.
DMS Switch
21. The MK-82 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

MK-82 Weapon Profile

Stations Selected

20b
20a
20d

20c

205
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

22. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE)
position by Right Clicking on the switch. 23
23. Select CCIP CONSENT option with the SEL Rocker Key.
24. If CCIP CONSENT option is not in “OFF”, use the DATA rocker key to cycle 24
between modes until “OFF” is displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

25. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Left Clicking on the switch. The
Heads-Up Display will revert to its normal state.

25b
24 23

22

25a

206
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

26. Press the Master Mode button until the CCIP HUD Mode is selected.
27. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.
28. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, MK-82
profile and ARM status are displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

26b

HUD is SOI

28

26a
Master Mode Switch

27
Coolie Hat Switch

207
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE 33
Weapon Release Button
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

29. Perform a shallow dive between 10 and 45 deg from at least 10000 ft.
30. When you are pitched down more than 3 degrees, a dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line) will appear
when you are not yet close enough to the target (the aiming pipper is currently positioned too low to be visible on the HUD).
31. Maneuver the aircraft to place the designation pipper over the intended target and then press and HOLD the weapon release
button (RALT+SPACE).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

32. With the weapon release button held down, the PBIL will turn solid and an Azimuth Steering Line (ASL) will appear along the
heading to the designated target. On the ASL a small circle will appear called the Solution Cue and next to the cue is the Time To
Release Numeric (TTRN).
33. As you fly to the target along the ASL, the Solution Cue and ASL will start to drop down on the HUD. If 3/9 is selected, the
Solution Cue simply needs to pass through the reticle.
34. With the weapon release button still held down and the Solution Cue passing through the pipper / reticle, the bomb(s) will
automatically be released.
32 Solid PBIL (Projected Bomb Impact Line)

Dashed “Out of Solution” PBIL


(Projected Bomb Impact Line)

Solution Cue and TTRN (Time


to Release Numeric)

ASL (Azimuth Steering Line)

Designation Pipper CCIP Bombing Reticle


9 o’clock position

3 o’clock position
31 208
Target
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
A-10C

Solution Cue TTRN (Time to


PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Release Numeric)

Projected Bomb
Impact Line (PBIL) CCIP CR Bombing HUD, In Solution, Pre-release

Release Mode

Profile Name
Projected Bomb
Azimuth Steering
Impact Line (PBIL)
Line (ASL)

Designation Pipper

CCIP Bomb Reticle


CCIP CR Bombing HUD, Out of Solution

CCIP CR Bombing HUD, Target Designated

Solution Cue and


TTRN (Time to Reticle and Pipper
Release Numeric)

209
2.1 – MK-82 LOW-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS - CCIP
WARTHOG 2.1.2 – CCIP-CR RELEASE MODE
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

210
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
4
A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Select MK-82AIR Bomb (green when selected)
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
3
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

211
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
8b 9b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

5. Set CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode


6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Bomb Drop
• PRS (Pairs): Bombs dropped in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will release the set 8a
number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will release the 9a
number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail).
• The Fuze setting will determine whether the bomb is released in “slick”
(high drag ballute assembly NOT deployed) or “retarded” (high drag ballute
assembly deployed) mode.
• To drop as a slick, select only a nose fuze.
• To release retarded, select nose/tail or tail fuze setting in the DSMS profile.
8. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC
scratchpad (6), then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY. 6
9. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the desired distance on the
UFC scratchpad (75), then pressing the OSB next to FT.
10. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings. 7

8c

9c

10 5

212
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
17b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

11. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in
mils) on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment).
Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.
12. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in ft) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). 17a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.


13. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the
UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10
18
and +30 ft/sec.
14. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then
press on the OSB next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40.
15. Select desired Escape Maneuver Type
• NONE: No Escape Maneuver 15 11
• CLB: Climbing Maneuver
• TRN: Turn Maneuver 12
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver
16. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired HD (High Drag) or a LD (Low Drag) Time of
Fall (in sec) of the bomb from release time to impact time, enter ToF value on the 13
17c
UFC scratch pad, then press on the OSB next to HD TOF or LD TOF. We will leave
those at 0. 14
17. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up
Display, enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB
next to MIN ALT. 16
18. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

213
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

19. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
20. Select MK-82APO profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors,
then press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

20
Management Switch) left or right.
DMS Switch
21. The MK-82APO Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

MK-82 Weapon Profile

Stations Selected

20b

20a 20d

20c

214
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
D (OPTION 1)
A-10C

DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH HUD TDC AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)

22. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is selected.
23. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will 27
indicate HUD is SOI. TMS Switch
24. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that 5 MIL mode, CCIP release, MK-82APO profile and ARM status
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

are displayed. 26
25. By default, the TDC (Target Designation Cue) is caged on the Total Velocity Vector (TVV). Slew Switch
23a
26. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TDC to the desired target location. Coolie Hat Switch 22a
27. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to make the current TDC location Master Mode Switch
the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
TVV (Total Velocity Vector) Tadpole (direction to SPI)
25 TDC (Target Designation Cue) Caged
in TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
26
HUD is SOI 23b
TDC (Target
22b
Designation Cue)
TDC is the SPI

24

27

TDC is the SPI 215


2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
D (OPTION 2):
A-10C

DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH TARGETING POD AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)

22. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is selected.
23. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod.
23
24. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode.
25. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).

24b

22a
Master Mode Switch

22b 25b

25a
216
Coolie Hat Switch 24a
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
D (OPTION 2):
A-10C

DESIGNATE SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) WITH TARGETING POD AS THE SOI (SENSOR OF INTEREST)
26c
26. Designate target with the Targeting Pod Targeting Pod Reticle
a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch


• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target.
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight), press the China Hat Switch AFT SHORT.
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will toggle tracking modes
between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving target).
f) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
TGP Sensor Point of Interest Designated
g) Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
27. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that 5 MIL mode, CCIP release, MK-82APO profile and ARM status are displayed.

23a
Coolie Hat Switch 27

26c
Targeting Pod Reticle

26d
DMS Switch
26e / 26f
TMS Switch
26e

26c
26a Slew Switch 26f
Boat Switch 26b / 26g TGP SPI Designated
China Hat Switch 217
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
30b
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE Weapon Release Button

D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

29. Fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL)
with the ASL. The CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line).
30. At about 6 seconds on the TTRN, the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. Press and
hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) and maneuver the aircraft so that the
Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

31. Bombs will automatically release once the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.

29 30a 30c

Solution Cue

Projected Bomb Solution Cue &


Release Line (PBRL) ASL (Azimuth TTRN (Time to Release
Steering Line) Numeric) (seconds)
TOF (Time-of-Fall)
Display (seconds) Bomb is just about to drop
CCRP Pipper

MRC (Minimum
Range Caret)
Analog Range Bar
5 o’clock = 5000 ft 218
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
A-10C

Solution Cue Projected Bomb


Release Line (PBRL)

ASL (Azimuth MRS (Minimum


Steering Line) Range Staple)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CCRP Bomb Reticle TTRN (Time to Release


Numeric) (seconds)

DRC (Desired
Release Cue)

MRC (Minimum
TOF (Time-of-Fall) Range Caret)
Display (seconds)

Weapon Release
Mode

Weapon Profile
Name

Weapon Status
Indicator

Selected Stations

Analog Range Bar


5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
219
2.2 – MK-82AIR HIGH-DRAG UNGUIDED BOMBS
WARTHOG CCRP RELEASE MODE
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

31 220
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE 5

A: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Select M-151 Hydra 70 Rockets (green when selected)
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

1
3

3
Selected Stations

221
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE
7b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

5. Set CCIP (Continuously Computed Impact Point) Mode


6. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Rocket Launch
• PRS (Pairs): Rockets launched in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the set
number of rockets set from the RIP QTY (Ripple Quantity) setting
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7a
• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will launch the number
of rockets specified in the RIP PRS setting, in pairs
7. If required, set Rocket Ripple Quantity by typing the desired quantity on the UFC
scratchpad (2), then pressing the OSB (Option Select Button) next to RIP QTY.
8. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify rocket settings.

7c

8
5

222
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE
11b
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

9. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in
mils) on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment).
Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.
10. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in ft) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). 11a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Value must be between -15 and +15 mils.


11. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up
Display, enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB
next to MIN ALT. 12
12. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

10

11c

223
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

13. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
14. Select M-151 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile). 14
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data DMS Switch
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Management Switch) left or right.


15. The M-151 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

M-151 Weapon Profile

Stations Selected

14b
14d
14a

14c

224
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

16. Press the Master Mode button until the CCIP HUD Mode is selected.
17. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.
18. Verify on the Heads-Up Display that MAN REL mode, CCIP release, M-151
profile and ARM status are displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

16b

HUD is SOI

18

16a
Master Mode Switch

17
Coolie Hat Switch

225
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS
WARTHOG CCIP RELEASE MODE 22
Weapon Release Button
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

19. Perform a shallow dive between 10 and 45 deg from at least 10000 ft.
20. A CCIP Rocket Reticle & Pipper will appear when you are not yet close enough to the target
21. When the slant range to target is less than 2 nm, the range numeric under the CCIP reticle is removed and the analog
range bar within the reticle starts to unwind. Place the center of the CCIP Bombing Reticle on the target.
22. At a slant range of around 1 nm, hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to launch rockets.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CCIP Rocket Reticle

Pipper

Analog Range Bar


5 o’clock = 5000 ft
Numeric Range (nm) 12 o’clock = 12000 ft

Rocket Time of Flight (sec)


Rocket Selected

226
20 21
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG
CCIP RELEASE MODE
2.3 – HYDRA 70 ROCKETS

227
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION
The GAU-8/A Avenger 30 mm gun is the bread and butter of the A-10. Using seven barrels in a rotating Gatling-type system, a very high rate of fire can be achieved without
A-10C

excessive barrel heating. This is because as one barrel fires the other six are briefly cooling down. Each of the seven barrels acts as an individual 30 mm cannon with its own
breech and bolt, these are all joined around a single rotor along a common axis using a hydraulic motor.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

228
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) Gun CCIP Pipper
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: AMMUNITION Upper Dot: Impact point of armor-piecing rounds
Lower Dot: Impact point of HEI rounds
The GAU-8 gun can carry three types of ammunition:
A-10C

• Combat Mix (CM). One PGU-13 High Explosive Incendiary (HEI) for every five rounds of PGU-
14 Armor Piercing Incendiary (API) rounds. The API round uses Depleted Uranium (DU). This is
the ammunition of choice for armored vehicles and can destroy a tank out to 21,600 ft.

• High Explosive Incendiary (HEI). This load exclusively uses the PGU-13 (HEI) round.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• Target Practice (TP). Inert warhead round version used for training.

Ammunition types can be set via the Mission Editor. The IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control
Computer) Test Menu can adjust the gunsight reticle properties based on the ammunition type.

Ammunition Type

Number of Rounds &


Gunsight Ammunition Type Property
229
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: AMMUNITION 2c, 3b, 5c, 6c
ENT Button
If we have a specific ammunition type (i.e. HEI) loaded, we can modify the gunsight
A-10C

4b
ammunition type property through the IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) DATA Rocker
Test Menu since different ammunition types have different effective ranges. 2a, 5a, 6a
SEL Rocker
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Right
Clicking on the switch.
2. Use SEL rocker switch to select WEAPONS menu, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
3. Select 30MM menu by pressing ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

4. In the “AMMO TYPE” field, press the DATA rocker switch to toggle between CM (Combat
Mix), HEI (High Explosive Indenciary) and TP (Target Practice).
5. Once the desired ammo type is selected, select STORE menu with the SEL rocker switch,
then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
6. Select EXIT with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
7. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Left Clicking on the Switch
8. The DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page and HUD (Heads-Up Display) will
both display the selected ammunition type.
4a
3a 4c

2b
8
Number of Rounds & Type

5b 6b

230
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: RETICLES
The gun can use four gunsight modes. These can be cycled using DMS (Data Management Switch) Left or Right Short when the HUD
A-10C

is SOI (Sensor of Interest).

• CCIP Reticle: Provides the most accurate firing solution.

• CCIP Cross: Simplified CCIP reticle but almost just as accurate


PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• 4/8/12 Reticle: Less accurate than CCIP reticles, the top dot represents a 4000 ft slant range, the middle not a 8000 ft slant
range, and the bottom dot a 12000 ft slant range. Less accurate than other reticle types, but useful in case you can’t get CCIP DMS Switch
solution computed due to inaccurate elevation data (CCIP INVALID HUD message. Which indicates that the target is at an
elevation higher than the aircraft).

• 4000 ft Wind Corrected Cross: Cross is set for a 4000 ft wind corrected slant range. Less accurate than other reticle types, but
useful in case you can’t get CCIP solution computed due to inaccurate elevation data (CCIP INVALID HUD message. Which
indicates that the target is at an elevation higher than the aircraft).

231
CCIP Reticle CCIP Cross 4/8/12 Reticle 4000 ft Wind Corrected Cross Reticle
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.1 – INTRODUCTION: RETICLE MINIMUM ALTITUDE 2c, 3b, 6c
ENT Button
If a MIN ALT (Minimum Altitude to fire the guns safely) other than 0 has been entered in the IFFCC 30 MM
A-10C

5a, 7c
menu, the Minimum Range Cue indicator will appear to the right of the reticle. The MIN ALT setting is DATA Rocker
calibrated to when the cue is at the 3 o’clock position of the reticle. 2a, 4a, 6a, 7a
SEL Rocker
9
To modify a Minimum Altitude through the IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) Test Menu:
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by Right Clicking on the 9
switch. Minimum Range Cue
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

2. Use SEL rocker switch to select WEAPONS menu, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
3. Select 30MM menu by pressing ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
4. Use SEL rocker switch to select MIN ALT menu.
5. In the “MIN ALT” field, press the DATA rocker switch to increment MIN ALT value until you reach the
desired value.
6. Once the minimum altitude is set, select STORE menu with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the
UFC scratchpad.
7. Select EXIT with the SEL rocker switch, then press ENT on the UFC scratchpad.
8. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Left Clicking on the Switch
9. The CCIP Reticle will then display the Minimum Range Cue.
3a
4b
2b

1
5b
7b 8
6b

232
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) Gun Bore Line Cross
WARTHOG 2.4.2 – CCIP RETICLE
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)
A-10C

2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to ARM


(UP)
3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible 5
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure 6 GUNS Master Mode
the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW HUD is SOI
SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches are ON.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode is
5
selected. 7 Master Mode Button
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the DMS Switch
SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.
7. Press the DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT or RIGHT to
cycle between Gun Modes until the Gun CCIP Reticle is
visible.

7
CCIP Reticle
SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch
1 233
2
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.2 – CCIP RETICLE Note:
If the target is moving, you may want to use the moving target indices on the CCIP Gun Reticle. They assume lead
for a moving target at a constant speed of 20 knots perpendicular. For example: if a target is moving left to right at
8. Put target under reticle
A-10C

an estimated 10 knots, place target half way between the pipper and left moving target indices before firing.
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and
stabilize flight
10. Wait until target slant range is 0.7 nm
11. Depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun
burst
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CCIP Pipper Moving Target Indice


Upper Dot: Impact point of armor-piecing rounds
Lower Dot: Impact point of HEI rounds

Moving Target Indice Analog Range Bar


5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft

Numeric Range (nm)

Round Type / Round Counter


CM: Combat Mix

Weapon Status
Indicator
9 / 11
Gun Trigger
First Detent: Activates PAC and stabilizes flight
Second Detent: Fires gun 234
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.3 – CCIP CROSS
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)
A-10C

2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to ARM


(UP)
3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure
6
the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW HUD is SOI
SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches are ON.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode
5
is selected. 7 Master Mode Button
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as DMS Switch
the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is
SOI.
7. Press the DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT or RIGHT
to cycle between Gun Modes until the Gun CCIP Cross
Reticle is visible. 7
CCIP Cross

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch
1 235
2
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.3 – CCIP CROSS
8. Put target under reticle CCIP Cross
A-10C

9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and stabilize flight
10. Wait until target slant range is 0.7 nm
11. Depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun burst
Numeric Range (nm)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Round Type / Round Counter


CM: Combat Mix

Weapon Status
Indicator

9 / 11
Gun Trigger
First Detent: Activates PAC and stabilizes flight
Second Detent: Fires gun 236
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 RETICLE
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)
A-10C

2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to ARM


(UP)
3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure 6
the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW HUD is SOI
SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches are ON.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode
5 5
is selected. 7 Master Mode Button GUNS Master Mode
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as DMS Switch
the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is
SOI.
7. Press the DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT or RIGHT to
cycle between Gun Modes until the Gun 4/8/12 Reticle is
visible.
7
4/8/12 Reticle
SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch
1 237
2
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.4 – 4/8/12 RETICLE
8. We generally use the 4/8/12 reticle for targets that are above
A-10C

our current altitude (on a sloped hill for instance). Evaluate Target (Uphill, above us)
your target’s distance, then put target under pipper of the
4000 ft Slant Range Pipper
desired range.
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and
stabilize flight Gun Bore Line Cross
10. When you are in range and the corresponding Range Pipper is
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

on the target, depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1- 8000 ft Slant Range Pipper
second gun burst

4/8/12 Reticle
12000 ft Slant Range Pipper

Round Type / Round Counter


CM: Combat Mix

Weapon Status
Indicator

9/10
Gun Trigger
First Detent: Activates PAC and stabilizes flight
Second Detent: Fires gun 238
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND) 7
4000 ft Wind Corrected
WARTHOG 2.4.5 – 4000 FT WIND CORRECTED CROSS Cross Reticle

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


A-10C

2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction) Switch to ARM


(UP) 6
3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible HUD is SOI
4. To use the PAC (Precision Attitude Correction), make sure
the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) and PITCH and YAW
SAS (Stability Augmentation System) switches are ON.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Press the Master Mode button until the GUNS HUD Mode is 5
5 GUNS Master Mode
selected. 7 Master Mode Button
6. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as DMS Switch
the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is
SOI.
7. Press the DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT or RIGHT to
cycle between Gun Modes until the Gun 4000 Ft Wind
Corrected Cross Reticle is visible.

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
6
3
Coolie Hat Switch

SAS (Stability Augmentation System)


PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch
1 239
2
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)
WARTHOG 2.4.5 – 4000 FT WIND CORRECTED CROSS
8. We generally use the 4000 ft cross for targets that are above our Target (Uphill, above us)
A-10C

current altitude (on a sloped hill for instance). Evaluate your target’s
distance, then put target under 4000 ft cross.
4000 ft Wind Corrected cross
9. Partially depress gun trigger (first detent) to activate PAC and (align on target)
stabilize flight
10. When you are in range and the corresponding Range Pipper is on
the target, depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

gun burst

Round Type / Round Counter


CM: Combat Mix

Weapon Status
Indicator

9/10
Gun Trigger
First Detent: Activates PAC and stabilizes flight
Second Detent: Fires gun 240
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG
2.4 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-GROUND)

241
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
The JTAC (Joint Tactical Air Controller) is the radio operator that finds targets for you and requests air strikes. He is the main line of communication between the grunts on the
A-10C

ground and yourself. Here is an example by Ranger79: https://youtu.be/riIChrLLJqY?list=LLKDCQ2Y6CtqCjKceXO1J6hg

Performing a successful JDAM (Joint Directed Attack Munition) strike with the help of a JTAC is done in the following manner:
A. Find the JTAC radio frequency and request a fire mission. Then, enter coordinates in the CDU (Control Display Unit) for a new waypoint.
B. Set up a weapon profile, select it and arm the GBU-38 JDAM
C. Designate the waypoint with the target coordinates entered earlier as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

D. Perform the attack and launch the JDAM, which will home on the target by itself.

242
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM 7b
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES) 2b

A: ENTER JTAC TARGET COORDINATES


A-10C

1. Set required JTAC frequency (UHF 245.00 MHz).


2. Press “HOTAS MIC SWITCH DOWN” to communicate on UHF radio and select JTAC –
Axeman11 (F4) in radio menu.
8
3. Select “CHECK-IN 15 MIN” (F1)
4. You will contact the JTAC and give him your altitude and ordnance available, plus your
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

time available on station. 9


5. JTAC will answer “Type 3 in effect” and ask you when you are ready to receive a 9-line.
6. Select “READY TO COPY” (F1) to receive 9-line.
7. The JTAC will give you the 9-line and ask you when you are ready for remarks.
3
8. Select “READY TO COPY REMARKS” (F1)
9. JTAC will give you remarks.
10. Select “9-LINE READBACK” to repeat the information you have been given and confirm it
with the JTAC. 10a
4
11. JTAC will confirm your readback, send you a JTAC transmission and clear you to engage
target. 10b
5

11
6
1

Microphone Switch
• FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM) 2a 7a
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM) 243
• DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
What is a CAS (Close Air Support) 9-line and why is it important? The goal of a
A-10C

9-line is to provide you as much information as concisely as possible.

9-line

Line 1: IP/BP – Initial Point/Battle Position (N/A in our case)


Line 2: Heading from the IP to the Target (N/A in our case)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Line 3: Distance from the IP/BP to target (N/A in our case)


Line 4: Target elevation – 2900 feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL)
Line 5: Target description: Truck.
Line 6: Target location: Grid coordinates of target (UTM coordinates DQ083998)
Line 7: Target Mark Type: No Mark
Line 8: Location of Friendlies: JTAC located 800 meters Southeast of Target
Line 9: Egress semi-cardinal direction when departing from target: West

Remarks

Remarks generally include information about troops in contact or danger close,


SEAD support in effect, hazards, weather or other threats. In our case, the JTAC
wants us to use GBU-38 JDAMs.

JTAC TASKING:

When the JTAC mentions “Standby Data”, a NEW TASKING transmission is sent
to the MSG (Message) page.
• Click on the OSB next to MSG to access the Message page.
• Click on the OSB next to ACK (Acknowledge) to clear the caution.

244
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
The target coordinates given to us by the JTAC, which are given in “UTM” (Universal Transverse Mercator) format.
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

245
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
We have currently 3 existing waypoints. We will create a 4th waypoint with the target in “UTM” (Universal
A-10C

Transverse Mercator) format. The UTM coordinates of the target are DQ083998.

Target
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Waypoint 3 JTAC
(Friendly)

You

Waypoint 2
Waypoint 1

246
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
A: ENTER JTAC TARGET COORDINATES
A-10C

12. Enter target coordinates in CDU (Control Display Unit)


a) Set STEER PT selector to MISSION and PAGE selector to OTHER
12e
b) Select WP (Waypoint) FSK (Function Select Key) 12a
c) Select LSK (Line Select Key) next to STEERPOINT
12a
d) Select LSK next to ?4 to create Waypoint 4.
e) Select LSK next to L/L to toggle the coordinate format to UTM 12c
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

f) On CDU keypad, enter target coordinates given by the JTAC:


“DQ083998”.
g) Select LSK next to DQ coordinates to modify Waypoint 4 12f
coordinates with the ones you just entered.
h) On CDU keypad, enter name of the waypoint (we will call it
“JTAC1”).
i) Select LSK next to MSN004 to rename Waypoint 4.
j) And that’s it! Waypoint 4 is now created with the coordinates
provided by the JTAC.
12b 12g

12c

12d

12h
12i

12f 12h
247
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
13
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

13. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


14. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
15. Select GBU-38 Bomb (green when selected)
16. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
17. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode is the only selectable mode 19b
18. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

19. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display,
enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
20. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

16

19a

15

20

19c

17

18

248
14
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
B: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

21. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all
different weapon profiles available.
22. Select GBU-38 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors,
then press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data
Management Switch) left or right.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

22
23. The GBU-38 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
DMS Switch

23 GBU-38 Weapon Profile

22b
22a
22d

22c

249
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
C: SELECT TARGET WAYPOINT & SET IT AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST) 28b
A-10C

24. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of
Interest)
25. Select Waypoint 4/JTAC1 using the STEER rocker switch or the DMS (Data
Management Switch) UP/DOWN. 27 SPI
26. If STPT is not the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press the TMS (Target
Management System) Switch AFT LONG to set the current selected
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

steerpoint (4/JTAC1) as the SPI.


27. With Steerpoint 4/JTAC1 set as the Sensor Point of Interest, we can now 25
perform the JDAM strike
28. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is selected.

HUD is SOI 24

26

25

26
TMS Switch

25
24 DMS Switch 28a
Master Mode Switch
Coolie Hat Switch 250
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
32
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES) Weapon Release Button

D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

29. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and
maneuver the aircraft to align the middle of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
30. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock
position of the CCRP Reticle counter clockwise.
31. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range
Caret, MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

32. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until JDAM is released.
33. The JDAM will home on the target coordinates by itself, guided by its own embedded GPS.

29a 29b
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)
Maximum Range Caret
Release Cue / Analog Range Bar
5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft
CCRP Reticle

MAN REL (Manual Release)


In Range Indication

Selected Waypoint

Minimum Range Caret


Waypoint 4/JTAC1
251
2.5 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (JTAC COORDINATES)
NOTE:
A-10C

Launching a JDAM at blind coordinates is not recommended; you should


always make sure to have a visual look at the target before you decide to
bomb it back to the stone age.

Before performing the attack run, press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

to slave all sensors to the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), which is the
Steerpoint 4/JTAC1. The targeting pod will be slaved to the steerpoint
(allowing you to give the target a proper look) and the TAD (Tactical
Awareness Display) will display where the target point is in relationship to
other waypoints.
Waypoint 4
Waypoint 3
(SPI)

Waypoint 2
Waypoint 1

TGP slaved to Waypoint 4

You

China Hat Switch


TGP Page 252
TAD Page
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
The JDAM can home on a target designated by a targeting pod. Here is a great video by Bunyap showcasing this functionality: https://youtu.be/aaFdAbODqzQ
A-10C

Here is the best method to use this:

A. Set up a weapon profile, select it and arm the GBU-38 JDAM


B. Designate the target with the targeting pod and use the ranging laser to get an accurate range. Then, create markpoint.
C. Set markpoint as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

D. Perform the attack and launch the JDAM, which will home on the target designated by the targeting pod

253
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
1
A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Select GBU-38 Bomb (green when selected)
4. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
5. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode is the only selectable mode 7b
6. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display,
enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
8. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.

7a

7c

254
2
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

9. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all
different weapon profiles available.
10. Select GBU-38 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors,
then press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data
Management Switch) left or right.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

10
11. The GBU-38 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.
DMS Switch

11 GBU-38 Weapon Profile

10b
10a
10d

10c

255
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD & CREATE MARKPOINT
A-10C

12. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the LASER ARM
switch to ARM (ON) as well.
13. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G
(Air-to-Ground) Mode. 12
14. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the
TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

12

13b

14c
TGP is SOI

14a
TGP is not SOI

13a
14b
256
Coolie Hat Switch
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD & CREATE MARKPOINT
A-10C

15. Designate target with the Targeting Pod


a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target. 15c
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight), press the China Hat Targeting Pod Reticle
Switch AFT SHORT.
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will
toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target).

TGP Reticle

Slant Range
(nm)

15d
DMS Switch
15e
TMS Switch
15e

15c
15a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 15b
China Hat Switch 257
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM 26c
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD) Targeting Pod
ReticleON
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD & CREATE MARKPOINT
A-10C

16. Select desired Laser Designator Mode (LSR) with OSB.


17. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter see the TGP AG Control Page.
18. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is
latched once fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We
will choose LATCH OFF.
19. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

20. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert binding”) to fire laser. 21
21. While laser is firing, press TMS (Target Management System) RIGHT TMS Switch Nosewheel Steering Button 20

to create a markpoint based on the target position identified by the 22


reticle and the range computed by laser ranging.
22. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert binding”) to stop firing
laser.

17a
17b

TGP 19
Reticle

16

20
18
Laser is Firing
258
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD & CREATE MARKPOINT
A-10C

Note: the reason why we use laser ranging WHILE designating the markpoint is that failing to do so will create a markpoint behind the target since the TGP reticle will point
on the ground spot behind the target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Not Using Laser Ranging

Markpoint

Using Laser Ranging

Markpoint 259
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD)
C: SET MARKPOINT AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST)
A-10C

23. Set STEER PT selector to MARK (Markpoint) and PAGE selector to OTHER 23
24. Press Coolie Hat Switch UP to set Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of 23
Interest)
25. Select Steerpoint A/MRK A (Markpoint A) using the STEER rocker switch
or the DMS (Data Management Switch) UP/DOWN.
26. If STPT is not the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press the TMS (Target
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Management System) Switch AFT LONG to set the current selected


steerpoint (A/MRK A) as the SPI. 29b
27. With Steerpoint MRK A set as the Sensor Point of Interest, we can now
perform the JDAM strike
28. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the Sensor
Point of Interest (SPI).
29. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is selected.
25
HUD is SOI 24

24 Coolie Hat Switch


STPT is SPI 26
28 SPI

25

26
TMS Switch

25
DMS Switch
29a
Master Mode Switch
28 China Hat Switch 260
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM
33
WARTHOG (TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

30. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and
maneuver the aircraft to align the middle of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
31. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock
position of the CCRP Reticle counter clockwise.
32. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range
Caret, MAN REL will appear in the In Range Indication field.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

33. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until JDAM is released.
34. The JDAM will home on the target coordinates by itself, guided by its own embedded GPS.

Release Cue / Analog Range Bar


30a 30b 5 o’clock = 5000 ft
ASL (Azimuth 12 o’clock = 12000 ft Maximum Range Caret
Steering Line)

CCRP Reticle

MAN REL (Manual Release)


In Range Indication

Minimum Range Caret

261
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG
(TARGETING POD)
2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM

262
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
CBUs (Cluster Bomb Units) are generally used against “soft” targets. Some of them like the CBU-103 and CBU-105 use Wind Corrected Munition Dispenser kits to correct the
A-10C

effect of the wind on their trajectory.

Keep in mind that there are two parameters that we can adjust to improve the effectiveness of CBUs:
• Height of Function (HoF), which determines at which height the combs will release. It impacts area spread and accuracy.
• RPM, which is the area spread of the bomblets that affects the concentration of fire available on the target. This parameter is applicable to the CBU-87 and CBU-103 only.
Recommended value is experimental, but you can use a value of 1000.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CBU (Cluster Bomb Unit) Types


CBU-87: This Combined Effects Munitions (CEM) weighs 950 lbs and is an all- CBU-103: Standard CBU-87 cluster bomb fitted with an INS guidance kit to form a Wind
purpose cluster bomb. The SW-65 Tactical Munitions Dispenser contains 202 BLU- Corrected Munition Dispenser (WCMD, or “Wick Mid”). Unlike the GBU-31 and GBU-38, a
97/B Combined Effects Bomblets (CEB) and they are effective against armored and WCMD does not use GPS guidance. Rather, the WCMD system uses the aircraft’s inertial
unarmored targets. navigation system to “know” its current location and the location of the target, and then
Recommended HoF/RPM parameters: 1800 ft/1000 use the tail kit to steer the bomb to the target location.
Recommended HoF/RPM parameters: 1800 ft/1000
CBU-97: 1,000-pound class weapon containing sensor-fused sub-munitions for CBU-105: Wind Corrected Munitions Dispenser (WCMD, or “Wick Mid”) tail kit version of
specifically attacking armor. the CBU-97. Using Inertial Navigation System (INS) guidance, the CBU-105 can be dropped
Recommended HoF parameter: 2200 ft at much higher altitudes than the CBU-97 and guide to the targeted location (SPI).
Recommended HoF parameter: 2200 ft

Parameters (Applicable for CBU-87 and CBU-103) Parameters (Applicable for CBU-97 and CBU-105)

263
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD 4

WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)


A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

1. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page


2. Select “INV” (Inventory) page
3. Select desired CBU-105 station
4. Select “INV STAT” (Inventory Station)
5. Click repeatedly on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to HOF (Height of Function/Fall)
until a height of 2200 ft is selected
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

6. Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station only. If
you have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g., 5 and 7, select LOAD
SYM to load these parameters on both CBU-105 stations.

3
2

4 264
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
7
A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

7. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


8. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
9. Select CBU-105 Bomb (green when selected)
10. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu
11. CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode is the only selectable mode 14b
12. Set Release Type (Single, Pairs, etc.)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

13. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb settings.
14. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display,
enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
15. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.
10
9 14a

12
15

14c

13 11

265
8
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
A: SET WEAPON PROFILE, SELECT PROFILE & SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

16. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all
different weapon profiles available.
17. Select CBU-105 profile by pressing the Option Select Button
Selectors, then press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
17
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data DMS Switch
Management Switch) left or right.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

18. The CBU-105 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

18 CBU-105 Weapon Profile

17b
17a
17d

17c

266
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C

19. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the LASER ARM
switch to ARM (ON) as well.
20. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G
(Air-to-Ground) Mode. 19
21. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the
TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

19

20b

21c
TGP is SOI

21a
TGP is not SOI

20a
21b
267
Coolie Hat Switch
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C

22. Designate target with the Targeting Pod


a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target.
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight), press the China Hat 22c
Switch AFT SHORT. Targeting Pod Reticle
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will
toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target).

TGP Reticle

Slant Range
(nm)

22d
DMS Switch
22e
TMS Switch 22e

22c
22a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 22b
China Hat Switch 268
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD)
C: SET TARGETING POD TARGET AS SPI (SENSOR POINT OF INTEREST)
A-10C

23. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in 23 TGP is SOI
the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT
since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
24. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG
to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
25. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).


26. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is
selected.

STPT is SPI 23

26
23 Coolie Hat Switch

24
TMS Switch

26 25 SPI
Master Mode Switch
25 China Hat Switch 269
TGP is SPI 26
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
30
WARTHOG (CCRP + TARGETING POD) Weapon Release Button

D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

27. From an altitude of at least 5000 ft (optimal between 10000 and 15000 ft), fly level and maneuver the aircraft to
align the middle of the CCRP reticle with the ASL.
28. When you are at the Maximum Range, the Release Cue will move from the 12 o’clock position of the CCRP Reticle
counter clockwise.
29. When the Release Cue is between the Maximum Range Caret and the Minimum Range Caret, MAN REL will
appear in the In Range Indication field.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

30. Press and hold down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) until CBU is released.
31. The CBU will home on the target by itself, guided by its own embedded GPS. At the programmed HoF (Height of
Function), the dispenser will release bomblets, which will slowly descend on the target and explode in clusters.

27a 27b
Maximum Range Caret
ASL (Azimuth
Release Cue / Analog Range Bar
Steering Line)
5 o’clock = 5000 ft
12 o’clock = 12000 ft

CCRP Reticle
MAN REL (Manual Release)
In Range Indication

SPI

Minimum Range Caret

270
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT WARTHOG
2.7 – CBU-105 WCMD
(CCRP + TARGETING POD)

271
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB 4
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
5a
A: PROGRAM GBU-12 LASER CODE
A-10C

1. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page


2. Select “INV” (Inventory) page
3. Select desired GBU-12 station (Station 4)
4. Select “INV STAT” (Inventory Station)
5. Enter desired GBU-12 laser code on the UFC scratchpad (i.e. 1687). 5b
6. Click on the OSB next to LSR CODE to set new laser code (1687) on the GBU.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7. Click on OSB next to LOAD if you want to load these parameters for this station
only. If you have a symmetrical (same) loadout on opposite pylons (e.g., 4 and 8,
select LOAD SYM to load these parameters on both GBU-12 stations.

4 272
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD) 11

B: SELECT WEAPON
A-10C

8. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)


9. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
10. Select GBU-12 Bomb (green when selected)
11. Select PROF (Weapon Profile) menu

10
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

GBU Laser
8 Code 1687

273
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
C: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

12. Set CCRP (Continuously Computed Release Point) Mode


13. Set Release Type
• SGL (Single): Single Bomb Drop
• PRS (Pairs): Bombs dropped in Pairs
• RIP SGL (Ripple Single): Each press of the weapon release button
will release the set number of bombs set from the RIP QTY (Ripple
Quantity) setting
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• RIP PRS (Ripple Pairs): Each press of the weapon release button will
release the number of bombs specified in the RIP PRS setting, in
pairs
14. Set Bomb Fuze Setting (Nose, Tail, or Nose & Tail) 13
15. If required, set Bomb Ripple Quantity by typing the desired
quantity on the UFC scratchpad, then pressing the OSB (Option
Select Button) next to RIP QTY. 14
16. If required, set Bomb Interval Distance in feet by typing the
desired distance on the UFC scratchpad, then pressing the OSB
next to FT.
17. Select the OSB next to CHG SET (Change Settings) to modify bomb
settings.

17 12

274
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
25b
C: SET WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

18. Set Auto Laser as desired. We will laser manually, so we will leave this to OFF.
• If set to ON, the laser will fire automatically according to the LS TIME (seconds before bomb
impact). For best accuracy, set this to 8 seconds before impact. If set to 0, the laser will default to
firing 4 seconds before impact.
19. OPTIONAL: If using an horizontal offset (we aren’t), enter Horizontal Offset value (in mils) on
the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to RT (Right Adjustment). Value must be
between -15 and +15 mils.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

25a
20. OPTIONAL: If using a vertical offset (we aren’t), enter Vertical Offset value (in ft) on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to UP (Upwards Adjustment). Value must be
between -15 and +15 mils.
29
21. OPTIONAL: If using a Weapon eject Velocity setting, enter velocity in ft/sec on the UFC
scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to EJECT. Value must be between -10 and +30 ft/sec. 18
22. OPTIONAL: If using a bomb rack delay, enter delay on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the 23
OSB next to RACK. Value must be between -0.40 and +0.40.
23. Select desired Escape Maneuver Type
• NONE: No Escape Maneuver
• CLB: Climbing Maneuver 24
• TRN: Turn Maneuver
• TLT: Turn Level Turn Maneuver
24. OPTIONAL: If you want to set a desired Time of Fall (in sec) of the bomb from release time 25c 19
to impact time, enter ToF value on the UFC scratch pad, then press on the OSB next to DES
TOF. 20
25. OPTIONAL: If you want to see Minimum Release Altitude cues on the Heads-Up Display, 26
enter Minimum Altitude on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to MIN ALT.
21
26. OPTIONAL: If AUTO LS is ON, enter how many seconds before weapon impact that wish the
laser to start firing on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to LS TIME.
Otherwise, leave it to 0. 22
27. Select Solution Option: flight path of bomb between ORP for Optimal Release Point and BAL
for Ballistic release point 27
28. Verify all weapon profile parameters are set as desired
29. Press on the OSB next to SAVE to save Weapon Profile.
275
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
C: SELECT WEAPON PROFILE
A-10C

30. Once weapon profile is saved, the DSMS page will showcase all different
weapon profiles available.
31. Select GBU-12 profile by pressing the Option Select Button Selectors, then
press on the OSB next to ACT PRO (Active Profile).
• Cycle between profiles and stations using the DMS (Data 31
DMS Switch
Management Switch) left or right.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

32. The GBU-12 Profile will be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

GBU-12 Weapon Profile

Stations Selected

31b

31a 31d

31c

276
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C

33. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod. Set the LASER ARM
switch to ARM (ON) as well.
34. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page. Then, select the A-G
(Air-to-Ground) Mode. 33
35. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the
TGP page on the right MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

33

34b

35c
TGP is SOI

35a
TGP is not SOI

34a
35b
277
Coolie Hat Switch
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C

36. Designate target with the Targeting Pod


a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
22c
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
Targeting Pod Reticle
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target.
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight), press the China Hat
Switch AFT SHORT.
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will
toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target).

TGP Reticle

Slant Range
(nm)

36d
DMS Switch
36e
TMS Switch 22e

36c
36a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 36b
China Hat Switch 278
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
D: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD 37 TGP is SOI
A-10C

37. Verify TGP is SOI. If it’s not, press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in
the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (RIGHT
since we have the TGP page on the right MFCD).
38. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG
to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
39. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).


40. Press the Master Mode button until the CCRP HUD Mode is
selected.

STPT is SPI 37

40

37 Coolie Hat Switch

39 SPI
38
TMS Switch

40
Master Mode Switch
39 China Hat Switch TGP is SPI 38 279
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
43a
E: LASE TARGET
A-10C

41. Select desired Laser Designator Mode (LSR) with OSB.


42. Press the OSB next to CNTL to enter see the TGP AG Control Page.
43. Enter the desired Laser Code on the UFC Scratchpad. We will choose laser code
1687, which we set previously on the GBU-12 of station 4. 21
44. Press on the OSB next to “L” (Laser Designation Code) to enter laser code 1687. 43b
TMS Switch
45. Select desired LATCH mode with OSB (LATCH ON means the laser is latched once
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

fired by pressing the Nosewheel Steering Button). We will choose LATCH ON.
46. Press OSB next to RTN (Return) to go back to Main TGP page.
47. Press the Nosewheel Steering Button (“Insert binding”) to fire laser. Nosewheel Steering Button 47

Note: Normally, you would first launch the GBU-12, then fire the laser to guide the
weapon. For simplification purposes, we will lase first then attack.

42a
42b

46

41

44

45
20

Laser is Firing
280
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD) 49b
Weapon Release Button
F: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

48. Fly level and maneuver the aircraft to align the CCRP Projected Bomb Release Line (PBRL) with
the ASL. The CCRP pipper should lay along the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line).
49. At about 6 seconds on the TTRN, the Solution Cue will start to fall down the ASL. Press and hold
down the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) and maneuver the aircraft so that the Solution
Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
50. Bomb will automatically release once the Solution Cue falls through the CCRP pipper.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

51. Verify that Laser is firing (blinking “L” on the HUD). If not, press the Nosewheel Steering Button
(“Insert binding”) to fire laser.
52. The bomb will follow the laser until it hits the target.
53. After bomb impact, press the Nosewheel Steering Button again to stop firing the laser.
51 53 Nosewheel Steering Button
Solution Cue &
39a TTRN (Time to Release 49c
48 Numeric) (seconds) Analog Range Bar
Projected Bomb 5 o’clock = 5000 ft
TOF (Time-of-Fall) 12 o’clock = 12000 ft
Release Line (PBRL)
Display (seconds)

CCRP Pipper
Bomb is dropping
Laser is Firing

ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)

281
2.8 – GBU-12 PAVEWAY II GUIDED BOMB
WARTHOG (LASER-GUIDED WITH TARGETING POD)
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

282
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) 1


2. On the right MFCD, select MAV (Maverick) page
3. Press on the OSB next to EO OFF. This will start a 3-minute
alignment period for the Maverick’s Electro-Optical system.
4. During alignment, MAV page displays ALIGN and HUD
displays ALN. 4
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Missile alignment is complete once ALIGN caution 5


disappears from the MAV page and HUD displays RDY.

3b
3a 4

Alignment Time

283
2
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

6. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page


7. Select AGM-65 Missile (green when selected). You can cycle between
profiles and stations using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or
right. The Station will momentarily be displayed when switching stations,
then revert back to RDY. 7
DMS Switch
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7a

7b 7c
6

Maverick Reticle
(Caged/Boresighted)

Maverick Weapon Profile

Maverick Status: Ready


Maverick Station
Selected
284
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
9 Adjustment Boresight Function
B: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE Adjusts boresight position of the Maverick.
A-10C

8. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD Slew the Maverick to the desired boresight
that displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV position, and press the OSB next to ADJ OFF.
Seeker Indication With ADJ ON, the next time you cage the
page on the right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI
Relative to Boresight missile to boresight, it will automatically cage
(Sensor of Interest).
to the set position.
9. Set Adjustment Boresight Function as required (we will leave it
to OFF)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

10. If you want to adjust the missile slew rate, you can enter the
rate on the UFC scratchpad, then press on the OSB next to
SLEW. The default slew rate is 5.0, but some users recommend
9.0.
Active Maverick
Station Number

MAV sensor is SOI


8b
(Sensor of Interest)

Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)

10 Maverick Slew Rate Data Field

Maverick Seeker Center


8a
285
Coolie Hat Switch
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
B: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C

11. Lock target with the Maverick 11c


a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch Maverick Reticle
• FWD: Black Symbols
• MIDDLE: Force Correlate / AUTO
• AFT: White Symbols 11f
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch Maverick is the SPI
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the MAV reticle on the target.
• If required, use China Hat AFT SHORT to reset missile to its boresighted position
d) When you release the slew control, the Maverick will automatically attempt to lock onto the
center of mass of a target it detects inside the tracking gate. If it cannot lock on to a target,
after a few seconds, the seeker will go into Break Lock mode and the crosshairs will expand out
to the edges of the display.
e) Press TMS (Target Management System) switch AFT SHORT to ground stabilize the reticle.
f) Press TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to set Maverick as SPI (Sensor
Point of Interest)
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight

11e / 11f
TMS Switch

11c
11a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 11b
China Hat Switch 286
11d Maverick Seeker Center
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY 12
Weapon Release Button
C: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

12. When missile has a good lock (generally between 3 and 7 nm), press the Weapon Release button
(RALT+SPACE) to fire Maverick missile. LAUNCH INHIBIT message will be displayed if no valid lock is
obtained when pressing the Weapon Release button.

Note: flaps must be UP when firing a missile since it could be damaged by the missile launch.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Maverick Upper Tick Mark


Tick mark at the top of the DLZ staple represents the
Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm. Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic Maverick Seeker Locked on Target
Launch Zone) Range Staple
Maverick Reticle

Target Range Caret


and Numeric (nm) Maverick Line of
Sight Range (nm)

Maverick Lower Tick Mark


Tick mark at the bottom of the DLZ
staple represents the Maverick’s
minimum range.

Missile Time of Flight (sec)

SPI Sensor Indicator


MAV: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Maverick
287
2.9 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG MAVERICK SENSOR ONLY
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

288
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
The Maverick seeker, even if it can find and lock a target by itself, has a very limited range. It is quite clunky to use just by itself. The Targeting Pod (which has a much greater
A-10C

range and is easier to operate) can be used to designate a target. A press of the China Hat Switch FWD can then slave the Maverick seeker to the TGP Sensor Point of Interest,
which is quite handy since the missile will lock the target once in range.

Here is a great video by Bunyap showcasing this functionality: https://youtu.be/MpUtNEvFXNI

Here is the best method to use the Maverick in conjunction with the Targeting Pod:
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

A. Prepare and arm the Maverick Missile


B. Designate the target with the targeting pod, then set it as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
C. Slave Maverick seeker to the TGP SPI, then acquire lock on target with the Maverick
D. Perform the attack and launch the Maverick

289
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) 1


2. On the right MFCD, select MAV (Maverick) page
3. Press on the OSB next to EO OFF. This will start a 3-minute
alignment period for the Maverick’s Electro-Optical system.
4. During alignment, MAV page displays ALIGN and HUD
displays ALN. 4
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Missile alignment is complete once ALIGN caution 5


disappears from the MAV page and HUD displays RDY.

3b
3a 4

Alignment Time

290
2
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
A: PREPARE MAVERICK
A-10C

6. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page


7. Select AGM-65 Missile (green when selected). You can cycle between
profiles and stations using the DMS (Data Management Switch) left or
right. The Station will momentarily be displayed when switching stations,
then revert back to RDY. 7
DMS Switch
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7a

7b 7c
6

Maverick Reticle
(Caged/Boresighted)

Maverick Weapon Profile

Maverick Status: Ready


Maverick Station
Selected
291
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD
A-10C

8. On AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel), set TGP switch ON (UP) to power up the targeting pod.
9. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to TGP (Targeting Pod) to display the TGP Feed Page on the left MFCD.
Then, select the A-G (Air-to-Ground) Mode.
10. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed (LEFT since we have the
TGP page on the left MFCD). This will set the TGP as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9b

10c
TGP is SOI

10a
TGP is not SOI

10b 9a
292
Coolie Hat Switch
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR Maverick Reticle

B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD


A-10C

11. Designate target with the Targeting Pod


a) Select desired Video Mode with the Boat Switch
• FWD: FLIR BHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared Black Hot)
• MIDDLE: CCD (Charge Coupled Device/TV)
• AFT: FLIR WHOT (Forward-Looking Infrared White Hot)
b) Select Field-of-View Mode with the China Hat Switch
• FWD SHORT toggles between WIDE and NARROW
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

c) Use the Slew Control Switch UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to set the TGP reticle on the target.
• Note: If you want to reset the TGP in front of you (boresight), press the China Hat 11c
Switch AFT SHORT. Targeting Pod Reticle
d) Press on the DMS (Data Management Switch) FWD/AFT SHORT to adjust Zoom Level.
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target. This will
toggle tracking modes between AREA TRACK (static target) and POINT TRACK (moving
target).

TGP Reticle

Slant Range
(nm)

11d
DMS Switch
11e
11e
TMS Switch

11c
11a Slew Switch
Boat Switch 11b
China Hat Switch 293
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
B: DESIGNATE TARGET WITH TARGETING POD 12 TGP is SOI
A-10C

12. Verify TGP is SOI (Sensor of Interest). If it’s not, press the Coolie
Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your
TGP feed (RIGHT since we have the TGP page on the right
MFCD).
13. Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG
to designate the TGP Sensor Point of Interest (SPI).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

STPT is SPI 13a

13c SPI

12 Coolie Hat Switch

13b
TMS Switch

TGP is SPI 13c


China Hat Switch 294
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
C: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C

14. Press the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD
that displays your MAV feed (RIGHT since we have the MAV
page on the right MFCD). This will set the Maverick as the SOI Active Maverick
(Sensor of Interest). Station Number
15. Press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG to slave all sensors to
the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI). This will slew the Maverick
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

missile automatically to the point designated by the Targeting


Pod, which is the current SPI.
16. Keep in mind that the Maverick has not locked a target yet.
The seeker will likely be into Break Lock mode and the
crosshairs will expand out to the edges of the display.

MAV sensor is SOI


14b
(Sensor of Interest)

Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)

Expanded Break Lock


14a Crosshairs
295
Coolie Hat Switch
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV) Maverick Reticle
(Slaved on Targeting Pod SPI)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
C: LOCK TARGET WITH MAVERICK MISSILE
A-10C

17. Lock target with the Maverick.


a) As you approach the target, check the DLZ (Dynamic Launch Zone) to estimate
the range.
b) When you are in range (between 3 and 7 nm), press TMS (Target Management
System) switch FWD SHORT to attempt a lock on the target. You may need to
attempt this a couple of times.
c) Once target is locked on the Maverick, the crosshair symbology will change.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Targeting Pod is the SPI

Maverick Seeker Center


(Locked)
Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight 17c

17a Maverick Seeker Center


17b
(Not Locked)
TMS Switch

296
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR 18
Weapon Release Button
D: PERFORM ATTACK
A-10C

18. When missile has a good lock (generally between 3 and 7 nm), press the Weapon Release button
(RALT+SPACE) to fire Maverick missile. LAUNCH INHIBIT message will be displayed if no valid lock is
obtained when pressing the Weapon Release button.

Note: flaps must be UP when firing a missile since it could be damaged by the missile launch.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Maverick Upper Tick Mark


Tick mark at the top of the DLZ staple represents the
Maverick’s maximum range. It is fixed at 15 nm. Maverick Dynamic
Launch Zone (DLZ)
Maverick DLZ (Dynamic Maverick Seeker Locked on Target
Launch Zone) Range Staple Maverick Reticle

Target Range Caret


and Numeric (nm)

Maverick Lower Tick Mark


Tick mark at the bottom of the DLZ
staple represents the Maverick’s
minimum range.

Missile Time of Flight (sec) Maverick Line of


Sight Range (nm)

SPI Sensor Indicator


TGP: Current Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is from Targeting Pod
297
2.10 – AGM-65 MAVERICK (IRMAV)
WARTHOG TARGETING POD SENSOR
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

298
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR)
WARTHOG A - GUN PROCEDURE
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)
A-10C

2. Set GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude Correction)


Switch to GUNARM (DOWN)
3. Confirm that GUN READY indication is visible
4. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up
Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk
5
will indicate HUD is SOI.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

3
5. Press a hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode
Switch to enter Air-to-Air Master Mode
6. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT
to cycle through the AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-menu)
4
aircraft options to match the aircraft you are
HUD is SOI
engaging. In our case, we will choose a profile set
for the Su-25.

4 1 2
Coolie Hat Switch

AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) Setting &


6
Ammunition Count

6 5 299
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR) Target
Gun Boresight Reticle
AMIL (Air Mass Impact Line)
WARTHOG A - GUN PROCEDURE
7. When you have selected the correct AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) setting
A-10C

and have the target within the funnel with just the wing/rotor tips
touching the sides of the funnel, you can fire the gun.
8. You can also use the AMIL (Air Mass Impact Line) to assist in gun
Gun Funnel
aiming. This is a vertical line which represents the lead angle due to
trajectory shift and gravity drop of rounds from close range out to
approximately 2 seconds time of flight. The top of the AMIL shows
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

where the bullets will be just after the firing burst and the distance
they will fall towards the earth after 2 seconds due to deceleration and
gravity drop.
9. Depress trigger (second detent) to fire a short 1-second gun burst

9
300
Gun Trigger
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR)
WARTHOG B - SETTING GUN FUNNEL WINGSPAN
To set up custom wingspan values for the gun funnel:
A-10C

ENT Button
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) to TEST (MIDDLE) position by DATA Rocker Key
Right Clicking on the switch. SEL Rocker Key
2. Select AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) option with the SEL Rocker Key.
3. Press ENT to enter AAS menu.
4. The AAS menu determines what preset wingspan profiles are programmed and
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

which ones are available via the DMS (Data Management Switch).
5. Select the profiles you want to have access to by moving the cursor with the SEL
rocker key, then press ENT to make them available or not (o = available).
6. MAN-FXD is a programmable profile for Fixed Wing aircraft, while MAN-RTY is a 4
programmable profile for Rotary aircraft like helicopters.
7. We want to program a custom profile for a MiG-21. Select MAN-FXD menu with the
SEL rocker key, then press ENT.

O: Profile Available

6
1 7

301
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR)
WARTHOG B - SETTING GUN FUNNEL WINGSPAN
8. In the MAN FXD menu, we need to set the target’s
A-10C

wingspan (in feet), length (in feet) and approximate


ENT Button
airspeed (in knots). DATA Rocker Key
9. FXD WNGSPN field is already selected. SEL Rocker Key
10. Set FXD WNGSPN to the MiG-21’s wingspan of 23 ft
with the DATA rocker switch. 8 10
9
11. Select FXD LENGTH field with the SEL rocker switch. 11 12
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

12. Set FXD LENGTH to the MiG-21’s length of 49 ft.


13. Select FXD TGTSPEED field with the SEL rocker switch.
14. Set FXED TGTSPEED to an approximate speed of 200
kts.
15. Select STORE option with the SEL rocker switch, then
press ENT.
16. Select EXIT AAS menu with the SEL rocker switch,
then press ENT.
17. Set IFFCC switch to ON (UP) position by Left Clicking
on the switch. HUD will revert to its normal mode.

17a
13
15

14

17b
16

302
3.1 – GAU-8 GUN (AIR-TO-AIR)
WARTHOG B - SETTING GUN FUNNEL WINGSPAN
18. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI
A-10C

(Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will indicate HUD is SOI.


19. Press a hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode Switch to enter
Air-to-Air Master Mode
Gun Funnel
20. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT to cycle through
the AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-menu) aircraft options to match the aircraft
you are engaging. In our case, we will choose the custom profile set 19
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

for the MiG-21, which is MAN-FXD.

18
HUD is SOI

18
Coolie Hat Switch

AAS (Air-to-Air Sub-Menu) Setting &


20
Ammunition Count

20 19 303
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch
3.2 – AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
WARTHOG 7
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP) Sidewinder Reticle
2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
A-10C

3. Select AIM-9 Air-to-Air Missile (green when selected).


4. Press Coolie Hat UP Short to set the Heads-Up Display as the SOI (Sensor of Interest). Asterisk will 6
indicate HUD is SOI.
5. Use DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT/RIGHT to select desired weapon profile.
6. Press a hold approx. 3 seconds the Master Mode Switch to enter Air-to-Air Master Mode
7. Sidewinder missile reticle is caged in boresight mode by default. This mode is quite limiting but is 4
HUD is SOI
useable if you steer the aircraft to set the reticle on a target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

8. Press TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to uncage Sidewinder. Reticle will
start moving and actively look for heat signatures to track.
5
• Note: if you want to cage the missile, press the TMS Switch AFT SHORT. Weapon Profile
9. While missile is searching, you will hear a low-pitch growl.
10. You can slew the Sidewinder reticle using the Slew Control Switch.

4
Coolie Hat Switch

8
TMS Switch
10
2 3 Slew Control Switch
5 6
DMS Switch Master Mode Switch 304
3.2 – AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
WARTHOG
11. When sidewinder tracks a heat signature, the reticle will lock
on the target and a high-pitch growl will be heard.
A-10C

12. Press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to fire


Maverick missile

12
Weapon Release Button
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

11
Sidewinder reticle locked on target
(high pitch growl)

305
3.2 – AIM-9 SIDEWINDER
WARTHOG
Note:
A-10C

• You can also use the targeting pod in AA (Air-to-Air) mode to spot a target. When A-A is first entered, the TGP will enter A-A boresight mode. From the boresight
mode, you may slew the TGP crosshair using the slew switch. When slewing, the TGP camera moves in a space stabilized manner.
• If the valid air target passes within the narrow field of view area (represented by the four corner markers), the TGP will attempt to track the target and place a cross
“+” on it. If the target flies outside the narrow field of view area, the cross will disappear.
• If you then command TMS Forward Short HOTAS command (command point track), the target will be centered in the crosshair and a box will be drawn around the
target to conform to its size. When in this mode, “POINT” will be displayed as well as the tracking cross. To exit POINT track, the user may command INR track and
return to RATES mode.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

306
4 – ORDNANCE JETTISON
WARTHOG 4.1 - SELECTIVE JETTISON
1. Set Master Arm Switch ON (UP)
A-10C

1
2. Select DSMS (Digital Stores Management System) page
3. Press OSB next to SJET (Selective Jettison)
4. Select desired station with the OSB (Option Select Button) next to it. DSMS store will flash when selected.
5. Select Jettison Mode
• RACK: jettisons weapon launcher rack as well as weapon store
• STR: jettisons weapon store but not the rack

PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

MSL: fires Maverick missile without arming or guiding it


6. Select Fuze Option Mode (only applicable if STR (Store) mode is selected)
• SAFE: store disarmed
• NOSE ARM: nose fuze is armed
• TAIL ARM: tail fuze is armed 6 5
• ARMED: N/T (Nose/Tail) fuze is armed
7. Press the Weapon Release button (RALT+SPACE) to fire Maverick missile
4
3

7 2
Weapon Release Button 307
4 – ORDNANCE JETTISON
WARTHOG 4.1 - SELECTIVE JETTISON
A-10C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

MK-82AIR Store
Fuze safe / Rack Mode Selected

Weapon Rack 308


4 – ORDNANCE JETTISON
WARTHOG 4.2 - EMERGENCY STORES JETTISON
Pressing the “EXT STORES JETT” button will jettison all stores (excluding the Targeting Pod and ECM pod) on
A-10C

stations 1 through 11.

Once pressed, and regardless of landing gear handle position, all stores will be released in station priority order.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

External Stores Jettison Button


Jettisons all external stores except
Targeting Pod and ECM pods

309
A-10C
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES WARTHOG
COUNTERMEASURES

310
COUNTERMEASURES – INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
Countermeasures are very simple to use. You have three countermeasure types
at your disposal: flares, chaff and an ECM (Electronic Countermeasure) jammer.
A-10C

We will explore together what is used against what, and how.

Missiles can generally track you using 2 things: radar signature (radar waves are
sent on you and you reflect them, which is called a “radar signature”) and heat
signature (like the exhaust of your engines). Countermeasures will only be
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

effective against the kind of weapon it was meant to counter; a heat-seeking


missile will not care if you deploy electronic countermeasures against it since it
tracks heat, not radar signatures. This is why it is important to know what is
attacking you in order to counter it properly. This is what the RWR (Radar
Warning Receiver) is for: to help you know what is firing at you so you can take
the adequate action to counter it.
Flares
Flares are used against missiles that track heat (infrared or IR) signatures.
Instead of going for the heat signature generated by your engines, a missile will
go for a hotter heat source like flares.

Chaff is a form of “passive” jamming. Passive (reflected) jamming is when a Chaff


deceptive object or device reflects radar waves. Chaff is simply a bundle of small
pieces of metal foil with reflective coating, which creates clusters of radar
signatures that prevent a radar to get a solid lock on the aircraft itself.

The AN/ALQ-131 ECM jammer pod is a form of “continuous” jamming, also


called “active” or “transmitted” jamming. This device transmits its own
synchronized radar waves back at your enemy’s radar receiver to simulate
erroneous radar wave returns. Simply put, active jamming will try to drown a
radar in white noise.

In order to use these three forms of countermeasures, you can use


“countermeasure programs”, routines that will deploy a number of flares/chaff
for a number of cycles at a given interval. A detailed list of these programs is
shown next page.
311
COUNTERMEASURES – CONTROLS
WARTHOG
A-10C

CMSP (Countermeasure Signal Processor) Panel


PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

CMS (Countermeasures Switch)


• DOWN: ECM ON/OFF
• FORWARD: Initiate countermeasure program
(deploys flares/chaff routine)
• AFT: Terminate countermeasure program (cancels
flares/chaff routine)
• RIGHT: Next countermeasure program
• LEFT: Previous countermeasure program

312
COUNTERMEASURES – DISPENSERS
WARTHOG 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
The A-10 has four sets of chaff and flare dispensers. Two sets are on the wingtips (Mounted under undercarriage)
and these are generally loaded with chaff cartridges. The other two sets are
A-10C

housed in the rear of the main landing gear wheel bays, and these are generally
loaded with flares.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers

4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
(Mounted under wingtips)

4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers 4 x ALE-40 Chaff & Flare Dispensers
313
CMSP (COUNTERMEASURE SIGNAL PROCESSOR) PANEL
WARTHOG
The CMSP (Countermeasure Signal Processor) panel is located on the forward right console and is your primary means of selecting and programming the CMS
(Countermeasures Set) system.
A-10C

NXT (Countermeasure Program Cycle) Rocker Switch


Return / Save Program Button
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Countermeasure Program Selected


CMSP Brightness Control Knob
Chaff/Flare/Other Countermeasure System
Status Counters

JTSN (Countermeasure Jettison) Switch

CMS (Countermeasures Set) Mode Selector


• OFF
SET Option Select Buttons (OSBs) • STBY: Power is applied to the CMSP and CMSC and they
Selects items on the Alphanumeric Display window are fully functional and can be adjusted, but dispensing
chaff and flares is not possible and the ECM and MWS will
not take any active measures.
MWS (Missile Warning System) Power Switch • MAN: Manual Mode means that you must manually run
• FWD: MENU (No Function) the selected chaff/flare or ECM program with the
• MIDDLE: ON Countermeasure Switch on the HOTAS
CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch
• AFT: OFF • SEMI: Semi-Automatic mode will automatically select the
• FWD (Momentary): MENU
best chaff/flare program according to the detected radar.
• MIDDLE: ON
However, it is up to you to start and stop the
JMR (Jammer) Power Switch • AFT: OFF
countermeasure release program
• FWD: MENU (No Function)
• AUTO: system will automatically select the best
• MIDDLE: ON RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) Power Switch chaff/flare and ECM program and initiate and stop the
• AFT: OFF • FWD: MENU (No Function) program
• MIDDLE: ON
• AFT: OFF

314
CMSP (COUNTERMEASURE SIGNAL PROCESSOR) PANEL
WARTHOG
The DISP (Dispenser) Switch has two main functionalities listed below. CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch ON
FWD (Momentary): MENU
A-10C

When placed momentarily in the Up Menu position, you may program how the CMS releases chaff and flares
for the selected program (A-Z). Along the bottom of the display are fields for CHAF, FLAR, INTV and CYCL.

• CHAF. The Chaff field allows you to determine the number of chaff bundles that will be released in the
current program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the CHAF label and the numeric will flash
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount.
• FLAR. The Flare field allows you to determine the number of flares that will be released in the current
program. To set, you will press the SET button underneath the FLAR label and the numeric will flash
indicating it can be adjusted. You may then use the NXT button to increase or decrease the amount.
• INTV. The Interval field allows you to set the time between countermeasure releases in the current program.
This can be set the same way as chaff and flares but in increments of .25 seconds from .25 to 5.
• CYCL. The Cycle field allows you to set the number of times the program will repeat itself.

NXT (Countermeasure Program Cycle) Rocker Switch

CMSP DISP (Dispenser) Switch ON


MIDDLE: ON

When the DISP switch is in the ON position (after a 5 second RDY indication),
the alphanumeric display will change to allow you to view remaining chaff
and flare stores. When ON, CHAF, FLAR, OTR1 and PROG are displayed left to
right across the bottom on the display window. Above each of these on the
top line is a numeric that indicates how many of the expendables remain on
the aircraft or the selected dispenser program. The numeric will flash when it
SET Option Select Buttons (OSBs)
Selects items on the Alphanumeric Display window
is being dispensed.
315
CMSC (COUNTERMEASURE SET CONTROL) PANEL
WARTHOG
The CMSC (Countermeasure Set Control) panel allows you to control some aspects of the azimuth indicator display, view chaff and flare status, and change electronic
countermeasure (EC) and MWS (Missile Warning System) functions.
A-10C

Selected Countermeasure Program


PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Jammer Status Countermeasure Mode


Chaff Counter X: Standby
OFF Jammer Mode M: Manual
SBY: Standby AIR / SAM1 / SAM2 / AAA S: Semi-Automatic
OPER: Operating
A: Automatic

Jammer Mode Selector Button


Flare Counter
No Function

RWR PRI (Priority Mode) ON Light

No Function

RWR SEP (Separate) Selector


CMSC Panel Expands groupings of symbols on the RWR display such
Brightness Knob that they can be more easily read

RWR PRI (Priority Mode) Selector


RWR Audio Control Knob Displays 5 highest priority contacts only

Missile Launch (ML) Light


RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

316
COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAMS
WARTHOG
Your Countermeasure switch (CMS) has 5 functions.
• PRESSED DOWN: ECM (Electronic Countermeasure/Jammer) ON/OFF
A-10C

• FORWARD: Initiate countermeasure program (deploys flares/chaff routine)


• AFT: Terminate countermeasure program (cancels flares/chaff routine)
• RIGHT: Next countermeasure program
• LEFT: Previous countermeasure program
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

You can program your own “countermeasure program” if you wish, it is


explained in the main DCS A-10C manual.

The four main programs you should be using are: CMS (Countermeasure Switch)
CMS (Countermeasures Set) Mode Selector
• Program A: Old generation radar SAM site
• Program B: New generation radar SAM site
• Program C: IR heat-seeking SAM site
• Program D: Unknown/Miscellaneous

You can choose between a MANUAL mode (recommended) or the AUTO


mode, which automatically chooses the best countermeasure program for
you. I generally select program D since it counters pretty much anything. It
might consume a significant number of flares/chaff, but it is better to be out
of countermeasures than to be out of A-10.

317
ELECTRONIC COUNTERMEASURE (ECM) JAMMER Jammer Status
Countermeasure Mode
X: Standby
OFF
WARTHOG
Jammer Mode M: Manual
You have four main ECM jammer modes: SBY: Standby
AIR / SAM1 / SAM2 / AAA S: Semi-Automatic
OPER: Operating
A: Automatic
A-10C

• AIR: counters most air-to-air radars


• SAM1: counters older-generation SAM systems like the SA-3, SA-6 and SA-8
• SAM2: counters newer-generation SAM systems like 2S6, SA-16, SA-11, SA-10 and SA-15
• AAA: counters radar-directed gun systems like the ZSU-23-4 and the ZU-23.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

You can switch between jammer modes using the jammer mode selector button next to the
RWR. The jammer mode indicator tells you the mode you are using and the status of the
jammer. For instance, “OPR SAM1” means that you are using (operating) your ECM program
SAM1. “SBY” means that your ECM is not actively jamming enemy radar. Keep that in mind. Selected Countermeasure Program
Jammer Mode Selector Button

CMS (Countermeasures Switch)


• DOWN: ECM ON/OFF
• RIGHT: Next countermeasure program
AN/ALQ-131 ECM (Electronic
• LEFT: Previous countermeasure program
Countermeasure) Pod

318
RWR (RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
WARTHOG
Your RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) will tell you what are the radar emitting signatures around you with a top-down view, both friendly and enemy contacts. The
closer the symbol to the center of the circle, the stronger the radar signal strength.
A-10C

A symbol without a circle around it means that the radar is in search mode (in other words: not tracking you yet).

A symbol with a steady circle around it indicates that the radar is tracking/locked on to your aircraft. A missile is not heading your way yet, but it can be any second
now if the symbol is an enemy SAM site.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

A symbol with a flashing circle around it indicates that the radar is supporting a missile that has been launched at you. You are about to receive a missile right up the
arse. This is where you pop chaff, flares, ECM and start your evasive manoeuvers.
RWR PRI (Priority Mode) ON Light

RWR SEP (Separate) Selector


Expands groupings of symbols on the RWR display such
that they can be more easily read

RWR PRI (Priority Mode) Selector


RWR Audio Control Knob Displays 5 highest priority contacts only

RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

319
RWR SYMBOL LIST
List made by .408-X~RAY
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Note: “U” symbol stands for “Unknown”, which is sometimes attributed to ships.

320
MWS (MISSILE WARNING SYSTEM)
WARTHOG
The MWS (Missile Warning System) will indicate whether a missile is heading straight to your face or not. If the MWS warning light (red) is lit, immediately start evasive
manoeuvers and deploy countermeasures ASAP. You can have three different messages:
A-10C

• ACTIVE: MWS system is active


• LAUNCH: A missile is launched and heading towards you
• OFF: Your MWS system is off
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

The Radar Warning Receiver will display the direction of the missile launch with a “M” with a circle.

Radar Warning Receiver Missile Launch Indication


M: Missile Detected

No Function

Missile Warning System Message


When a missile launch has been detected by the Missile Launch Warning Light
MWS system, this window will indicate LAUNCH.
When the MWS has power, it will display
ACTIVE and with no power it will display OFF. 321
THE ART OF DEFEATING A MISSILE
WARTHOG
Evading missiles is an art: this is what we call “defeating a missile”. There are many videos that explain it well (much better than I could in
one page or 2), so here is a list of useful resources you can consult.
A-10C

DCS A-10 MISSILE AVOIDANCE, by A Kaiser


https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ak6EgzDwiGs
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

AIR POWER AUSTRALIA – EVADING THE GUIDED MISSILE, by Carlo Kopp


http://www.ausairpower.net/TE-Evading-Missiles.html

A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO MISSILE EVASION – TRAINING IN FALCON 4.0, by Mark “Boxer” Doran
http://www.simhq.com/_air/air_016a.html

FIGHTER COMBAT – TACTICS AND MANOEUVERING, by Robert L. Shaw


http://www.amazon.ca/Fighter-Combat-Maneuvering-Robert-Shaw/dp/0870210599

SA6 SAM Site

322
DATALINK INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
One of the biggest challenges of integrated modern warfare is the identification of contacts. As various information donors like friendly fighters, ground radar stations, AWACS
(Airborne Warning and Control System, like an E-3 Sentry or an E-2 Hawkeye), and ships interrogate unknown contacts with IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) systems, this
A-10C

information needs to be relayed to everyone within a given Network. This is where Datalink comes in; the Situation Awareness Data Link (SADL) integrates US Air Force close
air support aircraft with the digitized battlefield via the US Army's Enhanced Position Location Reporting System (EPLRS). More than just a radio or a data modem, SADL
provides fighter-to-fighter, air-to-ground and ground-to-air data communications that are robust, secure, jam-resistant and contention-free. With its inherent position and
status reporting for situation awareness, SADL provides an effective solution to the long-standing air-to-ground combat identification problem.
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

Datalink information shared


within a same network

323
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) PAGE
The A-10C is equipped with the Situational Awareness Datalink (SADL) such that it can communicate with friendly
A-10C

forces and be more aware of hostile forces in the operating area. When enabled with the JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio
System) switch on the AHCP (Armament HUD Control Panel) and the OWN and GROUP network (NET) identification
is set up properly, the following symbols can be displayed on the TAD.
JTRS (Joint Tactical Radio System) Power Switch
Attack Tasking Message Received
Upon receiving a JTAC target assignment, the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
ATTACK message will appear and flash at the
Broadcast ON/OFF Indication
top of the screen until you respond with a
CNTCO or WILCO response.
CNTCO (Cannot Comply) Response to Tasking
If you cannot comply (CNTCO) with the target
assignment, pressing OSB (Option Select Button) next
Wilco (Will Comply) Response to Tasking to CNTCO will clear the Assigned Target symbol and
If you decide to accept the Target Assignment, ATTACK message from the TAD.
press OSB 19 and the Assigned Target symbol
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

will stop flashing and become solid and the Assigned Target
ATTACK message will be removed. When you receive a target assignment, this red triangle
symbol with a dot in the center will appear at the location of
the assigned target on the TAD. As with other symbols, you
may hook it for detailed data about the target. The
Mini-SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) appearance of this symbol will coincide with the ATTACK
When a SADL equipped unit is broadcasting its message at the top of the screen. Once received, you can
SPI across the SADL network, it will appear to either reply with a CNTCO or WILCO response. The symbol with
other SADL equipped units as a Mini-SPI flash until you respond.
symbol.
NET Page Selector
SADL Network Configuration page that will allow
you to set your OWN and GROUP numbers.

324
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG NETWORK CONFIGURATION
A SADL network is divided in groups, which are basically different flights. There are two sets of two-digit numbers associated with the SADL datalink: Group and Ownship.
A-10C

The first number is the Group ID (Identification); it is for you and the other members of your flight. You will all use the same GRP ID number.

The second number is your Ownship ID. This will be unique to your group and jet - so you might be Group 01, Own 01, and someone else can be Group 02, Own 01.

FLIGHT 1 – WINGMAN FLIGHT 2 - LEAD


GRP ID: 03 FLIGHT 2 - WINGMAN FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)
GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 04 GRP ID: 01 GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 02
OWN ID: 04 OWN ID: 01

FLIGHT 1 – WINGMAN
GRP ID: 01
SADL NETWORK OWN ID: 02
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)


GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 01

FLIGHT 2 - LEAD
GRP ID: 02
OWN ID: 01

FLIGHT 2 - WINGMAN
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) GRP ID: 02
Can be broadcast to all members of the SADL Network OWN ID: 02
325
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG NETWORK CONFIGURATION
In order to use SADL, you need to join a network with a group identification number
A-10C

(GRP ID) and your own identification number (OWN ID). To set your group and own ID:
1. On TAD page, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to NET.
TAD Selector
2. Your current GRP ID and OWN ID are displayed on the right.
3a Exits NET page and returns to main TAD page
3. To select your GROUP ID number, enter the ID number on the UFC (Up-Front 4a
Control) scratchpad (i.e. 01) and press on the OSB next to GRP ID.
4. To change your own identification number, enter the ID number on the UFC (Up-
Front Control) scratchpad (i.e. 01) and press on the OSB next to OWN ID. If the
OWN ID number is already use by someone else, you will get an error message.
5. If desired, you can set your callsign by typing it on the CDU keypad (i.e. FAC1 for
Forward Air Controller 1), then pressing on the OSB next to CALL.

Own ID Number
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

3b
4b

4c

5
3 Group ID Number

1b

NET Page Selector


1a SADL Network Configuration page that will allow NET (Network Configuration) Page
326
you to set your OWN and GROUP numbers.
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG SYMBOLOGY
TAD (Tactical Awareness DIsplay) Cursor
Used to hook SADL symbols and SPIs
A-10C

TDC (Target Designation Cue)


Aircraft on the SADL network and on the same GROUP ID number
as you.
• Center number: OWN ID of the aircraft within the flight
• Lower number: altitude of aircraft in thousands of feet

Friendly SADL Networked Members


Aircraft on the SADL network but on a separate GROUP ID number.
• Lower number: altitude of aircraft in thousands of feet

Friendly Ground Forces


PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

Friendly ground forces; unit must be assigned an Enhanced Position


Location Reporting System (EPLRS) radio to broadcast their location

Mini-SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)


When a SADL equipped unit is broadcasting its SPI across the SADL
network, it will appear to other SADL equipped units as a Mini-SPI
symbol. This symbol looks like the standard SPI symbol but with one
less tier. Connecting this symbol to the broadcast aircraft is a blue
line.

SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Broadcast


When broadcasting your SPI to friendly forces, this field will be lit in
reverse video. When broadcasting your SPI, other SADL equipped units
will see your SPI on their displays as a Mini-SPI and a blue line connecting
your aircraft icon to your Mini-SPI. If you are flying in a multiplayer
mission and wish to send your SPI to other friendly aircraft, you must set
SPI to ON using the DMS Left Long HOTAS command. 327
SADL (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS DATALINK)
WARTHOG FUNCTIONS
SADL has a number of useful functions we will explore in the following pages:
A-10C

• A: Capability to hook other wingmen or SADL symbols and get


information from them (type, coordinates, altitude, etc.)

• B: Capability to send messages to members of the SADL network

• C: Capability to receive messages from members of the SADL network

• D: Capability to broadcast a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) across the


whole SADL network or to specific members of the network. This is
useful to exchange target locations between members of a same flight.
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

• E: Capability to use a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) broadcasted from a


SADL network member

• F: Capability to task targets to other SADL members

• G: Capability to receive taskings from members of the SADL network (i.e.


a JTAC, Joint Tactical Air Controller)

328
A - HOOKING DATALINK SYMBOLS
WARTHOG
If you want to have a bearing, distance and elevation information on a specific TAD symbol (i.e. a Bullseye/Anchor
Point or Waypoint), you can “hook” a symbol using the TAD when it is the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
A-10C

1. Set the TAD as the SOI: press and hold the Coolie Hat Switch in the direction of the MFCD screen displaying the TAD
2. Use the Slew Control Switch to move the TAD Cursor over the desired symbol you want to hook. TAD symbols can
include the SPI, TGP diamond, waypoint/steerpoint, or bullseye.
3. Once TAD cursor is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the symbol. Hook Mode (OWN/BULL/CURS/HOOK)
4. Hooked Symbol Data will be displayed on the lower right of the TAD. Upper Row: Symbol from where the hook line begins
5. Select desired Hook Mode with the OSB. Lower Row: Symbol where the hook line ends
6. To Un-Hook a symbol, press the TMS (Target Management System) AFT SHORT.
7. To reset TAD cursor position, press China Hat Switch AFT SHORT. Shown: hook line goes from bullseye (BULL) to TAD Cursor (CURS).

• HOOK is the hooked symbol


• CURS is the TAD cursor
• OWN is your ownship
• BULL is the bullseye
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

1b
TAD is SOI (Sensor
of Interest)

Ownship Symbol
Hook Mode Selector 5

TAD Cursor 2 3 6

TMS (Target Management


Hook Line System) Switch

Waypoint 5 Symbol

China Hat Switch 7


2
Hooked Symbol
Coordinates Hooked Symbol (Waypoint 5) Data Slew Control Switch
151: Bearing To Symbol (deg) 1a
038: Distance To Symbol (nm) 4 329
4480: Symbol Elevation (ft) Coolie Hat Switch
A - HOOKING DATALINK SYMBOLS
WARTHOG
Here is an example that shows a wingman being hooked.
• Note: If TAD is SOI and you have a hooked target… press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD LONG to set the TAD hooked target as the Sensor Point of
A-10C

Interest (SPI). The HUD will then track this hooked contact.
Upper Number: Hooked Aircraft Bearing Relative to your direction
Square: Hooked Aircraft location
Lower Number: Distance to Hooked Aircraft (nm)

TAD Cursor (On Hooked Aircraft)

Hook Line
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

Hook Mode Selector

Hooked Symbol Ground Speed (kts)

Hooked Symbol Type

Hooked Symbol Hooked Symbol (Waypoint 5) Data


Coordinates 239: Bearing To Symbol (deg) TMS (Target Management
003: Distance To Symbol (nm) TAD Hooked System) Switch
6560: Aircraft Altitude (ft) Aircraft is the SPI 330
TN 0202: Identification Number (OWN ID 02 – GRP ID 02)
B - HOW TO SEND MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. Select TAD page
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the
A-10C

Coolie Hat Switch pressed in the direction of the TAD page


3. Slew TAD Cursor on Wingman. Its “TN” number will appear, which is its OWN 6
ID followed by its GRP ID in the SADL network.
4. Select MSG Page
5. Select NEW
6. On UFC (Up Front Control) Scratchpad, type TN Number of Wingman (0201)
7. Press the OSB next to “TO”. This will set who you send the message to.

5
2b
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

3b 7

1 4

3a
Symbol Data 2a Slew Control Switch
3c
TN 0201: Identification Number (OWN ID 02 – GRP ID 01) 331
Coolie Hat Switch
B - HOW TO SEND MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
8. Type desired message content on CDU (Control Display Unit) Keyboard
9. Select MOD TEXT to enter text
A-10C

10. With the SET LINE OSBs, set arrow next to text line you want to send
11. Click SEND MSG

9b
9a

9
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

7 11

332
C - HOW TO RECEIVE MESSAGES WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. NEW MSG means that a new message has been received.
2. Select MSG Page
A-10C

3. Select RCVD.
4. Message will be displayed.
5. To acknowledge the message, click on ACK.
6. To delete the message, click DEL.

1
3

6a
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

FROM
TN 2001: Identification Number (OWN ID 20 – GRP ID 01) 6b

5b

5a

333
D - HOW TO BROADCAST A SPI WITH SADL
WARTHOG
1. First, create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) with any sensor. As an example, we will choose the
targeting pod.
A-10C

a) Power TGP (Targeting Pod), then select TGP page in A-G mode.
b) Make TGP SOI with the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays
your TGP feed
c) Slew TGP with the Slew Switch
d) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target 1d 1e
TMS Switch
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor
Point of Interest (SPI).
1c
Slew Switch
1b
Coolie Hat Switch

1b TGP is SOI
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

1c
1e SPI

1d

1e
334
TGP is SPI
D - HOW TO BROADCAST A SPI WITH SADL
WARTHOG
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
A-10C

3. You can broadcast either on the whole SADL Network or to a specific aircraft
4. To send SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) to a specific aircraft:
a) Slew TAD Cursor on aircraft you want to send the SPI to
b) Click SEND button
5. To broadcast on whole NET:
a) Press DMS (Data Management Switch) LEFT LONG.
b) SPI ON indication will appear when SPI data is being broadcast.
c) Every member of the SADL network will then receive your SPI in its own TAD. 4a 5a
Slew Switch DMS Switch
6. The SADL members you sent the SPI to will see the SPI you just sent as a Mini-SPI symbol.
2
Coolie Hat Switch

Your Targeting Pod SPI


(Sensor Point of Interest) 6
Mini-SPI
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

4b

5b
4a TAD Cursor on
Wingman Symbol

View from your wingman’s TAD

2 TAD is SOI
335
E - HOW TO USE A SPI RECEIVED VIA SADL Mini-SPI (from Wingman)

WARTHOG
1. A SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) received via SADL from a wingman will be
visible as a “Mini-SPI” symbol (a two-tier wedding cake).
A-10C

2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the
Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
3. Slew TAD cursor on Mini-SPI symbol
4. Press TMS (Target Management System) FWD SHORT to hook the Mini-SPI Your SPI
5. Press TMS (Target Management System) FWD LONG to create your own SPI
(Sensor Point of Interest) from the Mini-SPI sent by your wingman.
6. Press China Hat FWD LONG to slave all sensors (Targeting Pod, Maverick
Missile, etc.) to your own new SPI. 6 China Hat Switch

2 Coolie Hat Switch

4 5 TMS (Target Management System) Switch 3 Slew Control Switch


1 Mini-SPI (designated by Wingman)
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

Line from Broadcasting


Wingman to Mini-SPI
Your SPI (created from
5
wingman’s Mini-SPI)
Mini-SPI
3 TAD Cursor (Hooked) 4

Wingman

2
You

336
F - TASKING TARGETS TO OTHER SADL AIRCRAFT
WARTHOG
In addition to receiving Target Assignments from JTAC and other SADL-equipped aircraft, you can also assign targets to
other SADL-equipped aircraft. This is done through a combination of using the SPI and active hooking.
A-10C

To create a Target Assignment:

1. First, create a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) with any sensor. As an example, we will choose the targeting pod.
a) Power TGP (Targeting Pod), then select TGP page in A-G mode.
b) Make TGP SOI with the Coolie Hat Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TGP feed 1d 1e
c) Slew TGP with the Slew Switch TMS Switch
d) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD SHORT to track the target
e) Press the TMS (Target Management System) switch FWD LONG to designate the TGP Sensor Point of 1c
Interest (SPI). Slew Switch
1b
Coolie Hat Switch

1a

SPI 1e
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

1b TGP is SOI

1d
SPI

1a

TGP is SPI 1e 337


F - TASKING TARGETS TO OTHER SADL AIRCRAFT
WARTHOG
2. Make TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat
Switch LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
3. Slew TAD Cursor on aircraft you want to send the Target Assignment to
A-10C

4. Once TAD cursor is over the symbol, press TMS (Target Management System) FWD
SHORT to hook the aircraft.
5. Network Identification (OWN ID – GRP ID) of the hooked aircraft recipient will appear
below the SEND label.
6. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to SEND to send the Target Assignment. 4
TMS Switch

2 3
Coolie Hat Switch Slew Switch

Your Targeting Pod SPI


(Sensor Point of Interest)
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

6
3a TAD Cursor

3b TAD Cursor on
Wingman Symbol

Wingman Symbol

2 TAD is SOI
338
F - TASKING TARGETS TO OTHER SADL AIRCRAFT
WARTHOG
7. Your hooked wingman will then receive a new tasking assignment, a NEW TASKING message will
appear on both of his MFCDs regardless of the current page.
8. On your hooked wingman’s TAD, a red triangle will be on the TAD at the location of the target.
A-10C

Target 8

Your TAD
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

Target seen Target seen by


by Wingman You (SPI)
FLIGHT 1 - WINGMAN
GRP ID: 01
OWN ID: 02

TASKING SENT

Your Wingman’s TAD

FLIGHT 1 – LEAD (YOU)


GRP ID: 01 339
OWN ID: 01
G - RECEIVING JTAC (JOINT TACTICAL AIR CONTROLLER) TASKING
WARTHOG
During the course of a mission, you may get mission tasking from a Joint Terminal Attack Controller (JTAC) or
another SADL-equipped aircraft that will provide you tasking against a ground target.
1. When you receive a new tasking assignment, a NEW TASKING message will appear on both MFCDs regardless of
A-10C

the current page.


2. To remove the message, press TMS (Target Management System) Switch LEFT SHORT.
3. Select TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) Page and make it SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat Switch
LONG in the direction of the MFCD that displays your TAD
4. A red triangle will be on the TAD at the location of the target. A green X will represent friendly units on the
ground.
5. A new tasking from the JTAC will be in the form of a digital 9-line briefing. You can consult it in the MSG page.
6. If you accept the tasking, press OSB (Option Select Button) next to WILCO (Will Comply). If you do not accept the
tasking, press OSB next to CNTCO (Cannot Comply) to decline.
TMS (Target Management 3 Coolie Hat Switch
2
System) Switch
Target 4
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

6 6

Friendly Unit 4

1
3

TAD is SOI

5 340
3
G - RECEIVING JTAC (JOINT TACTICAL AIR CONTROLLER) TASKING
WARTHOG
7. Because the target (red triangle) is a TAD object, it can be
hooked and be made your SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
8. Slew the TAD cursor on the target symbol (red triangle)
A-10C

using the Slew Control Switch


9. Hook the target symbol by pressing TMS (Target
Management System) Switch FWD SHORT.
10. Once target is hooked, a “CNC” (Cancel) option will be Target TAD Cursor
available
8
11. Bearing and distance (nm) to the SPI are displayed on the
TAD.
12. Press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch FWD 7
LONG to set the TAD hooked target as the Sensor Point of
Interest (SPI). A SPI symbol will appear.
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

SPI Symbol 12

10

9
12

TMS (Target Management


System) Switch 8 Slew Control Switch 341
11 Bearing 119 / Distance 4 nm
G - RECEIVING JTAC (JOINT TACTICAL AIR CONTROLLER) TASKING
WARTHOG
13. Once TAD SPI (Tactical Awareness Display Sensor Point of Interest) is designated, press the China Hat Switch FWD LONG
to slave all sensors to this new SPI.
14. HUD (Heads-Up Display), TGP (Targeting Pod) and MAV (Maverick Missile) sensors will all lock on the SPI.
A-10C

15. You can then use weapons as desired.

13 China Hat Switch

TAD SPI Symbol


TAD is SOI
PART 12 – DATALINK / SADL

TAD is the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI)

TGP Slaved on SPI

SPI

TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) HUD (Heads-Up Display) TGP (Targeting Pod) 342
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WARTHOG You have three main radios on your left console.
• The AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM # 1 radio set is used for air and ground units
• frequencies between 116.00 and 151.975 MHz
A-10C

• The AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM #2 radio set is used for communications with JTAC units
• frequencies between 36.000 and 76.000 MHz
• The AN/ARC-164 UHF radio set is used for wingmen, support flights, air traffic controllers
• frequencies between 225.000 and 399.975 MHz
• The Intercom Panel allows you to choose which radio set
you communicate on. Advanced radio tutorial:
http://en.wiki.eagle.ru/w/images/e/e4/DCS_A-10C_Warthog_Radio_Tutorial.pdf
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

343
INTERCOM CONTROL PANEL
WARTHOG
The Intercom system panel is a single interface between you and the various navigation and radio systems in regards to their audio input/output. While each of these
navigation and radio systems has their own audio (volume) controls, the Intercom panel overrides their settings. Additionally, the Intercom panel can control the volume
A-10C

level of tones associated with LASTE such as pull up, altitude, etc.

It also allows communication with ground crew (needed for arming and refueling your aircraft).

Audio Control Switches


• INT: Intercom Audio Power (communication with ground crew)
• FM: VHF/FM Receiver Audio Power
• UHF: UHF Receiver Audio Power
• VHF: VHF/AM Receiver Audio Power
• AIM: AIM-9 Sidewinder Seeker Tone Audio Power
• IFF: Interrogation Tone Audio Power
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Localizer/Marker Beacon Tone
Audio Power
• TCN: TACAN Tone Audio Power
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

HM (Hot Microphone) Switch

Intercom Volume Control INTERCOM Call Button

INTERCOM Selector Switch


Selects which radio your microphone is speaking to

344
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The VHF/AM (Radio 1) transmits and receives between 116.00 and 151.975 MHz. There are also
20 preset channels available.
A-10C

To use the VHF AM Radio:


1. Set Radio Frequency Mode to TR (Transmit-Receive)
2. Adjust Radio Volume as required.
3. Set Radio Function Selector to either MAN (Manual Frequency) or PRE (Preset Channel), as desired. We will
choose a manual frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch FWD .

Microphone Switch
5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM)
• DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

AN/ARC-186(V) VHF AM Radio #1 Control Panel


2 VHF Radio Volume Control Knob
VHF AM Radio Function Selector
EMER FM: Emergency FM Guard Frequency
EMER AM: Emergency AM Guard Frequency
MAN: Manual Frequency
PRE: Preset Channel 3

LOAD Button VHF Radio Frequency Dials 4


After a frequency has been manually entered, you may
press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will
be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed
in the Preset Indicator Window.
VHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
1 OFF
VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector TR: Transmit-Receive
345
DF: VHF Direction Finder
AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The VHF/FM operates between 30.000 and 76.000 MHz. In most missions,
Radio 2 will be used to communicate with JTAC units. There are also 20
A-10C

preset channels available.

To use the VHF FM Radio:


1. Set Radio Frequency Mode to TR (Transmit-Receive)
2. Adjust Radio Volume as required.
3. Set Radio Function Selector to either MAN (Manual Frequency) or PRE (Preset
Channel), as desired. We will choose a manual frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the
Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch AFT .
Microphone Switch
5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM)
• DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

VHF Radio Volume Control Knob 2

AN/ARC-186(V) VHF FM Radio #2


Control Panel
VHF FM Radio Function Selector
EMER FM: Emergency FM Guard Frequency
EMER AM: Emergency AM Guard Frequency
MAN: Manual Frequency
PRE: Preset Channel 3 VHF Radio Frequency Dials 4

LOAD Button
After a frequency has been manually entered, you may
press the LOAD button and that frequency channel will
VHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
be saved to the currently displayed preset channel listed
1 OFF
in the Preset Indicator Window.
TR: Transmit-Receive
DF: VHF Direction Finder
VHF Radio Preset Channel Selector
346
AN/ARC-164 UHF TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
The UHF radio has 20 preset channels (PRESET) and the ability to manually enter a channel frequency (MNL). The frequency
range runs from 225.000 to 399.975 MHz. During most missions, you will communicate with your flight using this radio.
A-10C

To use the UHF Radio:


1. Set Radio Function Selector to MAIN or BOTH.
2. Adjust Radio Volume as required.
3. Set Radio Frequency Mode Selector to either MNL (Manual Frequency) or PRESET (Preset Channel), as desired. We will choose a manual
frequency.
4. Set Manual frequency using the Frequency Dials, or the Preset Channel using the Preset Channel Selector.
5. Transmit using the Microphone Switch DOWN .

Microphone Switch
UHF Radio Test Display Button 5 • FWD: Transmits on VHF Radio 1 (AM)
• AFT: Transmits on VHF Radio 2 (FM)
UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials • DOWN: Transmits on UHF Radio

AN/ARC-164 UHF Radio Control Panel UHF Radio Preset Channel Indicator
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

UHF Radio Manual Frequency Dials 4 UHF Radio Preset Channel Selector

UHF Radio Frequency Repeater


UHF Radio Function Selector
OFF
MAIN 1
BOTH
ADF: Automatic Direction Finder UHF Radio Status Button

UHF Radio Tone Switch

2 UHF Radio Volume Control Knob


UHF Radio Frequency Mode Selector
MNL: Manual
3
UHF Radio Squelch Switch PRESET
GRD (Guard Frequency)
347
AN/ARC-164 UHF TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
A-10C

LOAD PRESET Cover


Lifting this cover reveals an orange button labeled LOAD. To load a frequency to a preset channel,
you simply:
1. Dial in the frequency manually
2. Select the preset channel you wish to assign the frequency to
3. Press the LOAD button.
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

348
WARTHOG
RADIO FREQUENCIES – AIRFIELDS
LOCATION FREQUENCY
Anapa 121.0
A-10C

Batumi 131.0
Beslan 141.0
Gelendzhik 126.0
Gudauta 130.0
Kobuleti 133.0
Kutaisi 134.0
Krasnodar Center 122.0
Krasnodar Pashkovsky 128.0
Krymsk 124.0
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

Maykop 125.0
Mineral’nye Vody 135.0
Mozdok 137.0
Nalchik 136.0
Novorossiysk 123.0
Senaki 132.0
Sochi 127.0
Soganlug 139.0
Sukhumi 129.0
Tblisi 138.0
349
Vaziani 140.0
FLIGHT CONTROLS Aileron
WARTHOG
Flight control in the A-10C is provided by a series of redundant pushrods and
hydraulic systems that actuate the ailerons (roll), elevators (pitch) and
rudders (yaw). Loss of a single hydraulic system will not disable control but
A-10C

the level of response will decrease depending on the control surface.

The primary elements of the A-10C Flight Control Systems (FCS) of the A-10
include the Stability Augmentation System (SAS), the Manual Reversion
Flight Control System (MRFCS), and the Enhanced Attitude Control System Aileron
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS

(EAC). In combination and according to the situation, the FCS determines


how the pilot’s control inputs are transferred to the aircraft.

Pitch control is provided by two elevators at the tail of the plane. In addition
to a direct link pushrod from the cockpit, the two connected elevators are
both powered by hydraulic system actuators. As such, if you lose one of the
hydraulic systems, the other system will handle the load of the other via a
shareable, linking shaft. If one of the two elevators actuators becomes
jammed, that linkage can be disabled and you can fly with the still
operational elevator. Pitch trim is provided by electrically driven trim tabs on
the ends of the elevators.

Roll control is provided by an aileron on each wing. As with the elevators,


the ailerons are powered by both hydraulic systems to provide control Rudder
redundancy. As a failure backup, the trim tabs can also be used to fly the
aircraft in the Manual Reversion Flight Control System (MRFCS). Roll trim is
provided by trim tabs on the trailing end of the ailerons.

Yaw control is provided by two rudders, both powered by the two hydraulic
systems. The rudders are controlled in unison by a single cable to the
actuators.

Take note that the A-10’s FCS (Flight Control System) is not a fly-by-wire
system and the pilot is much more in charge of what the aircraft is doing
rather than being a voting member. As such, the A-10 is very much a seat-of- Elevator
your-pants aircraft to fly and can be extremely responsive in the right hands.

Elevator

Rudder 350
SAS (STABILITY AUGMENTATION SYSTEM) SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
YAW CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches
WARTHOG
To help dampen and improve flying characteristics in pitch and yaw, the A-10C is equipped with the Stability
Augmentation System (SAS). SAS also provides you automatic turn coordination (adding the proper amount of SAS (Stability Augmentation System)
rudder input when banking the aircraft). The SAS assists in making the A-10C a very stable gun platform.
A-10C

PITCH CHANNEL ENGAGE Switches


Note: SAS relies upon hydraulic power, and the loss of hydraulics will result in the automatic disengagement of
the SAS channels.

Pitch SAS
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS

The SAS pitch channels allows the Integrated Flight and Fire Control Computer (IFFCC) to provide pitch control
functions up to +5/-2 elevator trailing edge. The most noticeable effect of this is pipper tracking on a target
through the HUD in the pitch axis.

Yaw SAS

The SAS yaw channels have three main functions:


• ± 7-degrees of yaw rate dampening
• ± 7-degrees of rudder authority for turn coordination Takeoff Trim Indicator Light
• ± 10-degrees of rudder authority for yaw trim

The SAS continuously compares the output of the two channels, and if there is an excessive difference, the
system will automatically deactivate both channels of the axis. SAS can also be disconnected with the SAS
disconnect button. Takeoff Trim Control Button

Note: For SAS operation, hydraulic power must be provided.

MRFCS (MANUAL REVERSION FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)


The MRFCS is used for emergency situations when both hydraulics systems have failed or a complete failure is
impending. Flight control is radically reduced and primarily relies on use of trim tabs to fly the aircraft. While
sufficient for light maneuvering, it is not feasible to land with.

Manual Reversion Flight


Control System (MRFCS)
FWD: Flight Controls Normal 351
AFT: Manual Reversion
AIRCRAFT AERODYNAMIC & STRUCTURAL LIMITS
WARTHOG
The A-10C has very gentle flight characteristics
and is overall very easy to fly.
A-10C

Aircraft Limits
Stall Speed 120 kts
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS

Maximum Not To Exceed (VNE) Speed 450 kts


at Sea Level
Cruise Speed 300 kts

Service Ceiling 45000 ft

Rate of Climb 6000 ft/min

Structural G Limit (300-450 kts) at +7.3 G


Sea Level -3.0 G
Combat Range 252 nm

Ferry Range 2240 nm

Negative G Limit: If you fly at negative G for more than


10 seconds, you risk the engines
shutting down due to lack of fuel
supply.

352
HUD DISPLAY MODES Airspeed Tape (kts)
Barometric Altitude Tape (ft)
WARTHOG
You can customize a number of parameters displayed on your
Heads-Up Display. For instance, you can set airspeed tapes,
A-10C

metric/imperial units, a radar altitude tape, airspeed type like


Indicated Airspeed (IAS), True Airspeed (TAS), Ground Speed (GS) or
Indicated Airspeed/Mach (IAS/MACH).
Display Options
TVV (Total Velocity Vector)
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS

(also called Flight Path Marker)


Airspeed (kts)
G: Ground Speed Pitch Ladder (deg)
T: True Airspeed
No letter: Indicated Airspeed

Barometric Altitude (ft)


Vertical Speed Tape (ft/min)
Flight Path Angle (deg)
Radar Altitude (RDRALT) Tape (ft)
The tape ranges from 0 feet at the bottom to
Radar Altitude (ft) 1,500 feet at the top. When above 1,500 feet
AGL, the tape is removed. The small horizontal
line on the tape indicates the set Altitude Alert
Floor setting.

RDRALT tape is only visible if TAPES (Airspeed &


Altitude) tapes are not enabled.

Heading Tape / Scratchpad Data Display

353
HUD DISPLAY MODES
4
WARTHOG 5
HUD Display Option Example:
1. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – TEST (middle
position) by right clicking
A-10C

2. Press SEL rocker switch to select DISPLAY MODES.


3. Press ENT button to enter menu. 3b
4. Select the TAPES menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA rocker
switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Airspeed and Altitude tapes
as desired.
PART 14 – FLIGHT CONTROLS & AERODYNAMICS

5. Select the RDRALT TAPE menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Radar Altitude tape as
desired.
6. Select the AIRSPEED menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle between airspeed types (Indicated Airspeed
(IAS), True Airspeed (TAS), Ground Speed (GS) or Indicated 6
Airspeed/Mach (IAS/MACH)). 7
7. Select the VERT VEL menu with the SEL rocker switch. Use DATA
rocker switch to toggle Y (Yes) or N (No) to set Vertical Velocity tape
as desired.
8. Set IFFCC (Integrated Flight & Fire Control Computer) – ON (UP
position) by left clicking

2 2

8b
2 SEL Rocker Switch
DATA Rocker Switch

3a

8a

354
AUTOPILOT
WARTHOG
The LAAP (Low Altitude Autopilot) has three main modes:
A-10C

• PATH (top LAAP switch position):


• This mode will attempt to keep the aircraft on its current flight path, represented by the total velocity vector symbol on the HUD. This mode will not engage
with a bank angle greater than 10-degrees.
• ALT/HDG (middle LAAP switch position):
• This mode will attempt to maintain the barometric altitude and heading of the aircraft when the mode was activated. This mode will not engage with a bank
angle greater than 10-degrees.
• ALT (down LAAP switch position):
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

• When this mode is engaged, the autopilot will attempt to maintain current bank angle and barometric altitude.

Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode


Selector Switch
• PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude
Autopilot Mode Engaged Indication
355
AUTOPILOT
WARTHOG 2 Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button
To use the LAAP (Low Altitude Autopilot):
A-10C

1. Select one of the three auto-pilot modes using the LAAP Mode Switch (PATH, ALT/HDG or ALT)
2. Engage autopilot by using either the Left Throttle Button or the Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button.
3. When engaged, Autopilot Mode is displayed on the HUD (Heads-Up Display).
4. If a control input is commanded while in autopilot, the active autopilot mode will automatically
disengage and a “WARNING, AUTOPILOT” message will be heard. You can also disengage autopilot by
pressing the Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button or Left Throttle Button.
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

Be advised: autopilot will only engage if you are flying level (+/- 5 degrees). Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode
Selector Switch 1
The A-10C does not include a route autopilot system that automatically flies the aircraft to a steerpoint • PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading
or along a loaded flight plan.
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude

2
3
Left Throttle Button
Autopilot Mode Engaged Indication Toggles Autopilot

356
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT)
WARTHOG
Introduced into later versions of the A-10A, the Low Altitude Safety and Targeting Enhancement (LASTE) system provides several advancements to the A-10A and later
A-10C. Chief among them is the autopilot system, CCIP and CCRP bombing modes, air-to-air HUD mode, and the EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control).
A-10C

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

Autopilot Engage/Disengage Button


Radar Altimeter Switch

Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode


Selector Switch
• PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude

LASTE (Low Altitude Safety and Targeting


Enhancement) Control Panel

357
GCAS (GROUND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM) Radar Altimeter Switch
WARTHOG
The GCAS (Ground Collision Avoidance System) provides you warning of a potential ground impact; however, it will not
prevent the impact. GCAS uses a combination of inputs from the radar altimeter, INS and LASTE computer to judge such
A-10C

an event. A GCAS warning is indicated by a large, flashing break-X on the HUD and a “PULL UP, PULL UP” audio message.

GCAS can provide you with an “ALTITUDE, ALTITUDE” audio alert messages when the aircraft is below a preset mean sea
level (MSL) altitude and above ground level (AGL) altitude. These altitudes are set on the Up Front Controller (UFC).

Note: If the RDR ALTM (Radar Altimeter) switch is in the NRM (normal) position, the radar altimeter is functioning and
will provide data for GCAS functions If the RDR ALTM switch is in the DIS (disable) position, the radar altimeter is
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

disabled as well as GCAS functions.

PULL UP X Cue

GCAS BREAK Warning

358
GCAS (GROUND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM)
WARTHOG
There are situations where you could want to fly low in order to avoid SAM sites or enemy air defenses. In this case, the GCAS could be very irritating. Luckily for us, it
is possible to manually set the altitude at which the LOW ALTITUDE WARNING of the GCAS is triggered.
A-10C

How to set Low Altitude Warning


1. Press on the ALT ALRT (Altitude Alert) button on the UFC (Up Front Control) Scratchpad.
2. The current Altitude Alert (i.e. 500 ft AGL, Above Ground Level) will be displayed
3. On the UFC Scratchpad, enter the desired Low Altitude Warning threshold you want to use. We will use 50.
4. Press ENT to set new Altitude Alert setting.
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

1
359
EAC (ENHANCED ATTITUDE CONTROL) SYSTEM
WARTHOG
The EAC (Enhanced Attitude Control) system was one part of the LASTE
update to the A-10A that provides an autopilot capability. EAC uses sensor
A-10C

data from the Embedded GPS INS (EGI) navigation system, the Central Air
Data Computer (CADC) and the SAS, and then provides input into elevator
and yaw as part of the SAS.

The EAC system provides two major FCS functions:


• Precision Attitude Control (PAC): In PAC 1, pressing the trigger (first Gun Trigger
gun trigger detent) in Gun master mode will trim the aircraft through (Two Stages)
SAS to keep the gun pipper on the target point. PAC 2 is activated when
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

firing the gun (second gun trigger detent). Gun Trigger Pressed
• Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP): includes the autopilot modes of (First Detent): PAC1
Altitude/Bank Hold, Altitude/Heading Hold, and Path Hold modes.
GUN/PAC (Precision Attitude
Combined, the FCS of the A-10C provides a good, stable weapons platform Correction) Arming Switch
to accurately employ weapons from. • ARM: Gun Armed, PAC enabled
• SAFE: Gun Not Armed, PAC disabled
The EAC switch has two positions: OFF (down) and ARM (up). • GUNARM, Gun Armed, PAC disabled
• When in the ARM position, EAC is provided to LASTE.
• If in the OFF position, the EAC functions are disabled and the EAC
caution light appears.

Gun Trigger Pressed


(Second Detent): PAC2

EAC (Enhanced Attitude


Control) Switch

Low Altitude Autopilot (LAAP) Mode


Selector Switch
• PATH: Keep current flight path
• ALT/HDG: Keep current altitude + heading 360
• ALT: Keep current bank angle and altitude
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT) CDU – SYS Sub-Page
WARTHOG WIND PROFILE CORRECTION
Winds have an effect on bombs, which can be managed with the help of Wind Correction functionalities of the LASTE.
A-10C

This is a complicated subject and forum user Boris was kind enough to provide an in-depth explanation on how to use it.
1
Bunyap’s Tutorial:
https://youtu.be/r5hCfUZZJhc

Boris’ forum thread:


https://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=124711
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

LASTE Wind/Temp Profile Spreadsheet


https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1rTUQqJYqq3yHsXjxUMA6MVvxgfI8nudMf8Nw95V2Mqk/edit#gid=0

361
LASTE (LOW ALTITUDE SAFETY & TARGET ENHANCEMENT)
WARTHOG WIND PROFILE CORRECTION
LASTE Wind/Temp Profile Spreadsheet
A-10C

https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1rTUQqJYqq3yHsXjxUMA6MVvxgfI8nudMf8Nw95V2Mqk/edit#gid=0
PART 15 – AUTOPILOT & LASTE SYSTEMS

5
8

6
7
4

362
WARTHOG
NAVIGATION SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 – Navigation Introduction
A-10C

• 2 – Navigation Mode Select Panel


• 3 – TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) & Moving Map Display
• 4 – HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
• 5 – Navigation Point Types
• 6 – Waypoints
• 6.1 – Waypoint Navigation
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

• 6.2 – How to Add Waypoints


• 6.3 – How to Edit Waypoints
• 6.4 – Waypoint Offset
• 7 – Markpoints
• 7.1 – Markpoint Navigation
• 7.2 – How to Add Markpoints
• 7.3 – Using Markpoints
• 8 – Flight Plans
• 8.1 – Creating a Flight Plan
• 8.2 – Using a Flight Plan
• 9 – Divert Function
• 10 – ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) Navigation
• 11 – TACAN Navigation
• 12 – Anchor Point/Bullseye
• 13 – ILS Tutorial

363
1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
Navigation in the A-10C is mostly done through the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), HUD (Heads-Up Display) and ADI (Attitude
Director Indicator) localizer & glide slope reference bars. The Standby Magnetic Compass can also be used as a backup. The A-10C uses a variety of navigation methods to
A-10C

direct you to mission locations. Depending on the mission or stage in the mission, you may use different navigation sources.

HUD (Heads-Up Display)


PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Magnetic Compass

ADI (Attitude Director Indicator)

TAD (Tactical Awareness Display)

HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) 364


1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION Stick
WARTHOG
CONTROL INTERFACES
Throttle
A-10C

Navigation systems can be controlled with four main interfaces:


• CDU (Control Display Unit) and AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)
• CDU (Control Display Unit) Page Repeater and UFC (Up-Front
Control) Scratchpad
• NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
• HOTAS (Hands-On-Throttle-and-Stick) Controls depending on
the selected Sensor of Interest (SOI)
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)

CDU (Control Display Unit)


NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)

CDU Page Repeater

AAP (Auxiliary
Avionics Panel)

UFC (Up-Front Control)

365
1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
EGI (EMBEDDED GPS & INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
A-10C

The EGI is the primary navigation system of the A-10C and provides accurate attitude, navigation, and vertical and horizontal steering information. If EGI fails, HARS can be
used as a backup. The Control Display Unit (CDU) is the primary interface device to the EGI, but can also be mirrored to an MFCD as the CDU Repeater Page.

EGI (Embedded GPS & Inertial


Navigation System) Power Switch
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode Selector
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

CDU (Control Display Unit)


The CDU provides the control and
information interface between you and the
EGI (Embedded GPS INS) navigation system.

AAP (Auxiliary Avionics Panel)


The AAP provides the power for both the
CDU and EGI (Embedded GPS/INS) systems.
366
1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
WARTHOG
HARS (HEADING & ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYSTEM)
A-10C

The Heading Attitude Reference System (HARS) is a gyro-platform navigation system that served as the initial, primary navigation system of the A-10A. As the A-10A evolved
into later versions, EGI was added and HARS has become a back-up system to the Inertial Navigation System (INS) when the EGI is inoperative.

When the INS of the EGI is not available, HARS is selected automatically on the Navigation Mode Select Panel. You can also select it manually when EGI is working, but there
would be no good reason to do so. As a backup system, HARS can provide good heading and attitude information, but it can become inaccurate with hard maneuvering or if
taken out of Slave to compass mode. It also cannot provide a TVV (Total Velocity Vector) on the HUD.
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

HARS (Heading & Attitude Reference System) Mode Switch System) Mode Selector
• SLAVED: SLAVE mode, also called gyro-magnetic mode, allows the Compass LATITUDE Correction Setting Knob
HARS gyro to be fed by the compass signal.
• DG: Directional gyro mode. If Slave mode fails, the DG (Directional
Gyro) mode acts as a backup. In DG mode the Gyro is uncoupled
from the compass and works autonomously.

SYNC IND
Shows sync between HARS gyro and magnetic azimuth
detector. Used in SLAVED mode.

HDG (Heading) Knob


Heading & Push-to-Sync Control

Magnetic Variation Selector Switch

N-S Switch
Selects which hemisphere (North/South) is in for DG and SLAVED modes.
367
2 – NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL
WARTHOG
The primary means of selecting sources of navigation is the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel). From here you can determine what navigation is displayed on the HUD or
feeds data to your flight instruments like the ADI and HSI. When a selection is active, the green triangle on the button will light.
A-10C

The two primary systems that can direct heading and attitude data. Both of these systems provide data to the HUD, ADI and HSI.
• HARS (Heading Attitude Reference System). This and the EGI button cannot be active at the same time. Pressing one will deactivate the other.
• EGI (Embedded GPS INS). This and the HARS button cannot be active at the same time. Pressing one will deactivate the other.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

ABLE/STOW ADI (Attitude Director


Indicator) Localizer Bar Switch

EGI (Embedded GPS INS) Mode


NMSP/NIMSIP: NAVIGATION MODE SELECT PANEL Selector
• HARS and EGI send data to HUD, ADI and HSI and cannot be used at the same
time. HARS is usually used as a backup system to EGI.
• TISL, TACAN and ILS use beacons and stations to navigate to and cannot be TISL (Target Identification
used at the same time. Set Laser) Mode Selector

UHF Homing Light


When the UHF control panel is set to
HARS (Heading Attitude Reference ADF (Automatic Direction Finder)
System) Mode Selector mode, the UHF light will turn amber

STR PT (Steer Point) Mode Selector


Course Deviator Indicator (CDI) on the
FM Homing Light
When the VHF/FM control panel is set to
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
homing mode, the FM light will turn amber.
operates in relationship to a steer point.

ILS (Instrumented Landing


ANCHR (Anchor Point / Bullseye) System) Mode Selector
HSI and Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
needles will point to the Anchor Point TCN (TACAN) Mode Selector 368
(Bullseye).
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
OVERVIEW
A-10C

The TAD (Tactical Awareness Display) is one of the most important tools at your disposal for navigation.

The TAD displays a plan-view of your current tactical situation


with the symbols representing your aircraft position (Ownship),
the Sensor Point of Interest (SPI), the Anchor Point/ Bullseye,
current steerpoint, active markpoint, datalink symbols, or
active flight plan with waypoints, and range rings.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

The TAD can be a Sensor Of Interest (SOI) which can be used to


designate the SPI using a cursor that is controlled by the HOTAS
allowing the pilot to hook symbols on the display.

A moving map with different scales can also be displayed. This


map has multiple scales with each scale using a different air
navigation chart type.

The TAD page is accessed by either pressing a page select OSB


with the TAD label or using the HOTAS to cycle MFCD pages.

On the TAD, a slewable cursor is displayed that can be


commanded with the HOTAS slew functions when the TAD
page is the SOI. The cursor is your means to select
objects/symbols on the TAD.

TAD Page Selected 369


3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
MOVING MAP
A-10C

The moving map has three modes: MAN (Manual), AUTO (Automatic) and OFF.

• MAN: Map scale can only be changed manually with the ADJ +/- rocker switch..
• AUTO: Map scale is automatically changed. Each map chart format is automatically assigned to its
corresponding default map scale. Each TAD range scale for both the CEN (Centered Mode) and DEP
(Depressed Mode) ownship positions is automatically assigned to a corresponding map scale
• OFF: Moving Map is removed but TAD symbology is still visible.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Range Scale

ADJ +/- Rocker Switch


Changes Map scale in MAN
mode only

Moving Map Mode Selector


MAN/AUTO/OFF

370
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
TAD Profile Selectors
WARTHOG TAD Control Menu Button ALL / LOFF / ACT / NONE
DISPLAY
A-10C

ADJ +/- Rocker Switch


Changes Map scale in MAN mode only
Range Scale
Bearing / Distance (nm) to Bullseye
(Anchor Point) Field-of-View Scale
Moving Map Mode Selector
MAN/AUTO/OFF
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

North Reference
TAD Cursor
Waypoint Symbol
Hook Mode Selector
(Waypoint 4)
TAD Copy Function SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (Waypoint 1)
• Function is only displayed if a symbol has first
been hooked. If a symbol is hooked and OSB is
pressed, the hooked symbol will be created as Coordinate Format
a new mission waypoint in the CDU LL: Latitude/Longitude
• If an open mission waypoint is available, the MGRS: Military Grid Reference System
number of the available waypoint will be listed OFF
with a “?” mark next to it (for example, “6?”).
Datalink SADL Network Configuration
Ownship Symbol

Bullseye / Anchor Point Hooked Symbol Aircraft


Ground Speed (kts) (if applicable)
Hooked Symbol Aircraft
Type (if applicable)
TAD Declutter Function
TAD Page Selector Button
Hooked Symbol Coordinates 371
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
SYMBOLOGY
A-10C

TGP (Targeting Pod) Diamond


PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

When the targeting pod (TGP) is on, a


green diamond is displayed on the TAD Waypoint/Steerpoint Symbol
that represents the line of sight point that
the TGP is pointed towards
Range Ring
Outer & Inner range rings are centered on the ownship symbol
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Symbol and provide you a quick means to judge ranges on the TAD. The
outside range ring represents the range set on the TAD scale,
from ownship symbol to outside range ring. For example, a 20
scale setting equates to 20 nautical miles between the ownship
symbol and the outside range ring.

Ownship Symbol (You!)


TAD Cursor Symbol

Bullseye (Anchor Point) Symbol

372
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
CONTROLS
A-10C

If the TAD is the current SOI (Sensor of Interest), HOTAS controls can provide a number of interesting TAD Scale
functions. To set the TAD as the SOI, press and hold the Coolie Hat Switch in the direction of the MFCD
screen displaying the TAD.
TAD Cursor
• TMS SWITCH: Target Management System
• FWD SHORT: Hook up TAD symbol.
• AFT SHORT: Un-hook TAD symbol
Note: TAD symbols can include the SPI, TGP diamond, waypoint/steerpoint, or Green Square
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

bullseye. TAD is the SOI (Sensor of Interest)

• DMS SWITCH: Data Management System


• FWD SHORT: TAD scale Increase
• AFT SHORT: TAD scale Decrease
• RIGHT SHORT: TAD Center/Depressed Mode

• CHINA HAT
• FWD SHORT: FOV (Field of View) EXP (Expand) Toggle
• AFT SHORT: Resets TAD cursor

• COOLIE HAT SWITCH


• LEFT/RIGHT/UP LONG: Sets SOI (Sensor of Interest)

• SLEW CONTROL SWITCH


• LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN: moves TAD cursor

China Hat Switch

DMS (Data Management Switch) Slew Control Switch


373
TMS (Target Management System) Switch Coolie Hat Switch
3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
EXPANDED MODES EXP1 & EXP2 Map moves with TDC
A-10C

If the TAD is the current SOI (Sensor of Interest), the China Hat FWD SHORT will toggle NORM, EXP1 and EXP2
expanded modes each time the switch is pressed. The Slew Control Switch will then move the map itself.

• For EXP1: For any given TAD range scale, this causes the current digital map format to “narrow” by one
increment. In other words, if the current digital map scale in NORM mode was 1:2M, it will “narrow” to 1:1M
once EXP1 mode is entered, regardless of the TAD range scale that was initially displayed in NORM mode.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

• For EXP2: For any given TAD range scale, this causes the current digital map format to “narrow” by one more
increment. In other words, if the current digital map scale in EXP1 mode was 1:1M (as is the case in the
previous paragraph), it will “narrow” to 1:500K once EXP2 mode is entered, regardless of the TAD range scale
that was initially displayed in NORM mode.

EXP1 Mode

China Hat Switch

Slew Control Switch

NORM Mode EXP2 Mode 374


3 – TAD (TACTICAL AWARENESS DISPLAY) & MOVING MAP DISPLAY
WARTHOG
ARS (ATTITUDE REFERENCE SYMBOL)
A-10C

In the lower left corner of each MFCD is the Attitude Reference Symbol (ARS). It provides you an
indication of the aircraft’s current pitch, roll and barometric altitude. The ARS symbol is composed of
three primary components:
• Ownship reference
• Ground reference
• Ownship altitude (073 = 7300 ft)
ARS (Attitude Reference Symbol)
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Shown: 45 deg dive, banking slightly right, altitude 7300 ft

375
4 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
WARTHOG
The HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) is your primary gauge to assist in navigation to steerpoints, TACAN beacons, and radio beacons. While you will likely be using HUD
symbology for most of your navigation purposes, a firm understanding of the HSI is necessary for access to additional navigation data that is not present on the HUD or
A-10C

CDU displays, and in case of battle damage.


PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

376
4 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
WARTHOG
A-10C

Lubber Line (Current Heading) Selected Heading Bug/Marker

Bearing Pointer 2 Course Selector Window


Points to current Steerpoint
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Range Indicator (nm) Course Arrow

Bearing Pointer 1
Points to magnetic bearing of selected TACAN station when TACAN
mode is selected. When in ADF mode, this indicator points to
Power OFF Flag
magnetic bearing of the selected UHF station. If both TACAN and
ADF are selected, the ADF takes priority. If neither TACAN nor ADF
modes are selected, the indicator aligns with Bearing Pointer 1.

Aircraft Symbol Compass Card

CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) Bearing Validity Flag

TO-FROM Indicator
Heading Set Knob
Bearing Pointer 2 Reciprocal Heading

Bearing Pointer 1 Reciprocal Heading Course Set Knob

377
5 – NAVIGATION POINT TYPES
WARTHOG
These are the available Navigation Point types use in the Warthog:
A-10C

• Waypoints
• Waypoints are pre-planned navigational points of reference for you to follow on route to your area of operation. You can create new ones, edit their
coordinates and create flight plans with them. The CDU database can hold up to 2,050 waypoints. It is important to understand that any waypoint can be set as
the current steerpoint or anchor point.

• Steerpoint
• A Steerpoint is the waypoint or markpoint currently selected.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

• Markpoints
• Markpoints are used to "mark" a point of interest, whether flying over an interesting area or an enemy sighting. You can create up to 26 markpoints; they are
numbered from A to Z.

• Anchor Point / Bullseye


• Also referred to as a “Bullseye”, an anchor point serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces.

Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display


Unit) Page Selector Knob
Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob • OTHER: In order to use the function select keys (FSK) on the
• FLT PLAN: Select flight plan to make all the waypoints in the CDU, the OTHER selection must be chosen. From OTHER you
active flight plan active. If selected, use of the Steerpoint will be able to add and modify data to the CDU and view
toggle switch will cycle between flight plan waypoints. FLT additional information.
PLAN must be selected to display the flight plan route on the • POSITION: Displays the POSINFO CDU page. This will provide
Tactical Awareness Display (TAD). information about your current position.
• MARK: When Markpoint is selected, cycling through waypoints • STEER: Displays the STRINFO page that will provide detailed
will only cycle through the markpoints that you created (A-Z). information about your steerpoint.
Note that Z is automatically created when a weapon is used. • WAYPT: Displays the WP INFO page. From this page you can
• MISSION: Selecting Mission will allow you to access the entire view basic information about your selected waypoint,
mission waypoint database steerpoint, and your anchor point.

Steerpoint Increment/Toggle Switch 378


6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO DESIGNATE A STEERPOINT FROM WAYPOINT DATABASE
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION


(you access all waypoints available for the current in the mission)
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector
Knob to STEER 4a DMS (Data Management Switch)
3. Press Coolie Hat UP to set HUD (Heads-Up Display) as the Sensor of
Interest (SOI) 3a Coolie Hat Switch
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

4. Select what Waypoint you want to use as your current Steerpoint.


Three different methods are available:
• METHOD A (DMS): While HUD is SOI, press the DMS (Data
Management Switch) UP/DOWN to cycle between waypoints.
Each waypoint selected will be set as the Steerpoint
• METHOD B (CDU): On the CDU (Control Display Unit), use the
STEER switch on the CDU or the +/- Rocker Switch
5
• METHOD C (UFC): On the UFC (Up Front Control), use the STEER
rocker switch. Waypoint Number & Name acting as Steerpoint
5. Selected Waypoint acting as the Steerpoint will be displayed on the
HUD and CDU.

4c
4b 4b

3b

HUD is SOI

379
1 2
6 – WAYPOINTS
TMS (Target Management Master Mode Button
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION 3
System) Switch
1
B: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A STEERPOINT
A-10C

1. Once Steerpoint has been designated, cycle Master Mode to NAV using the Master Mode Button
2. Select STR PT Navigation Mode on the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
3. If the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) isn’t set to STPT (Steerpoint), press the TMS (Target Management
System) Switch AFT LONG to set the Steerpoint as the SPI. Make sure HUD is SOI (Sensor of Interest)
with the Coolie Hat UP.
Steerpoint Bearing Pointers 1 & 2
4. Follow steering cues on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) and HUD (Heads-Up Display)
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

TVV (Total Velocity Vector) points towards Distance to Steerpoint (nm) Current Heading
the Steerpoint when STPT is the SPI

Steerpoint Symbology Selected Steerpoint Number / Name


40: Steerpoint is 40 degrees to your left
Square: Steerpoint Symbol
9.3: Distance to Steerpoint
1
Time to Go (TTG) and Time
on Target Delta (TOT)

3 HUD is SOI
Required Airspeed at Steerpoint to
meet DTOT (Desired Time-On-Target)

Desired Magnetic Heading


towards Steerpoint (327)

STPT (Steerpoint) is the SPI 3


2
(Sensor Point of Interest) Distance to Steerpoint (nm)
Shown: 9.4 nm to Steerpoint Current Time
380
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
B: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A STEERPOINT
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

North Reference

Waypoint Symbol
(Waypoint 3)

Steerpoint set to SPI


(Sensor Point of Interest)
(Waypoint 1)

Ownship Symbol

Desired Magnetic Heading


towards Steerpoint
381
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
B: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A STEERPOINT
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Tadpole Indicates Steerpoint


Direction when SPI is not Steerpoint

TDC (Target Designation Cue) is the


SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
382
6 – WAYPOINTS 2c
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
C: CONSULTING WAYPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all waypoints
available for the current in the mission)
2. To consult data on a desired waypoint:
a) Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to WAYPT. This
will display the WP INFO Page.
b) On the CDU keypad, enter desired waypoint number (i.e. “2” for Waypoint 2).
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

c) Press LSK (Line Select Key) next to Waypoint Number Field.

2b

WP INFO Page

Waypoint Number Waypoint Data


Waypoint Name
Time-to-Go to Waypoint
Heading to Waypoint/Distance to Waypoint (nm)
Detailed WAYPOINT
Data Selector

1
2a

Steerpoint Data Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data


Time-to-Go to Steerpoint Time-to-Go to Anchor Point
Heading to Steerpoint/Distance to Steerpoint (nm) Heading to Anchor Point/Distance to Anchor Point (nm)
383
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
C: CONSULTING WAYPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C

Detailed WAYPOINT Data Page


3b
3. To consult further data on Waypoint 2, press LSK (Line Waypoint Name
Select Key) next to WAYPOINT.
4. Use the Page Increment/Decrement Rocker switch to Desired Time-On-Target
cycle between WAYPOINT pages 1 and 2.

Waypoint Number Copy Data to Available


PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Mission Point No. 6


3a
Waypoint Elevation (ft)
Wind Heading / Speed (kts)
Waypoint Coordinates

Coordinate Display Selector


Page 1 of 2 LL: Latitude/Longitude
UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator
Waypoint Name
Waypoint Number

Waypoint Scale Mode


Enroute VNAV (Vertical Navigation)
Terminal Mode Selector
Approach 2D / 3D
High Accuracy

4 Waypoint Steering Mode


TO-FROM
TO-TO
DIRECT

Desired Time-To-Go Page 2 of 2


Desired Time-On-Target

384
6 – WAYPOINTS Time-To-Go to Steerpoint Waypoint Name acting as Steerpoint
Waypoint Number acting as Steerpoint
WARTHOG 6.1 – WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
Steerpoint Data
D: CONSULTING STEERPOINT DATA FROM CDU
A-10C

• DMH: Desired Magnetic Required Airspeed at


Heading to Steerpoint
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Steerpoint (kts)
• DIS: Distance to Steerpoint (nm)
RIAS: Indicated Airspeed
Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all • EL: Steerpoint Elevation (ft)
RTAS: True Airspeed
waypoints available for the current in the RGS: Ground Speed
mission) Bearing (BRG) or Radial (RAD) to
2. To consult data on the selected Steerpoint, Steerpoint
set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU Airspeed Display Selector
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

(Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to Selects Data for Waypoint IAS: Indicated Airspeed
STEER. This will display the STEERPOINT acting as Steerpoint TAS: True Airspeed
INFO Page. GS: Ground Speed

Arrival Time-On-Target to Steerpoint


Current Airspeed (kts)
IAS: Indicated Airspeed
TAS: True Airspeed
GS: Ground Speed

1
2 385
6 – WAYPOINTS 4a
WARTHOG 6.2 – HOW TO ADD WAYPOINTS
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all waypoints
A-10C

available for the current in the mission)


2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will allow
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the WP (Waypoint) FSK.
4. Select the WAYPOINT branch.
5. Select the "Copy to available mission point" LSK (?6 as shown in image below).
6. This will copy the contents of the selected waypoint into an available mission point slot that is not
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

currently being used (slot 6 in the case below). 3

4b

386
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.2 – HOW TO ADD WAYPOINTS
7. Select desired coordinate format.
A-10C

• L/L stands for Latitude/Longitude


• UTM stands for Universal Transverse Mercator, which is related to MGRS (Military Grid Reference
8
System) coordinate format
• We will choose L/L for simplicity. See the GBU-38 JTAC tutorial for UTM coordinates.
8. We will add the coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) for Groom Lake AFB:
• 37°13’08’’ North 115°47’07’’ West (Deg, minutes, seconds)
• 37°13.133’ North 115°47.116’ West (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes)
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

• Elevation 4494 ft
9. Enter the latitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (3713133) and press the LSK (Line
Select Key) next to the latitude field (N or S).
10. Enter the longitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (11547116) and press the LSK next to
the longitude field (E or W).
11. Enter the elevation of the new waypoint in feet using the keypads/scratchpad (4494) and press the LSK next
to the elevation field (EL).
12. Enter a unique name for the new waypoint (i.e. NAV WP006) using the keypads/scratchpad and press the LSK
next to the name field.
13. And that’s it! Your new waypoint is now created.

12b
9a

10a
11b
11a

9b
12a
10b

7
387
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.2 – HOW TO ADD WAYPOINTS
A-10C

New Waypoint can be selected


PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

as shown in section 6.1

388
6 – WAYPOINTS 4a
WARTHOG 6.3 – HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access all waypoints
A-10C

available for the current in the mission)


2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will allow
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the WP (Waypoint) FSK.
4. Select the WAYPOINT branch.
5. Select the waypoint you want to edit entering its number on the CDU keypad, then selecting the LSK
(Line Select Key) next to the Waypoint Number field.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

3
4b

5a

5b

Name of existing waypoint 4

389
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.3 – HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS
6. We will modify Waypoint 4’s coordinates (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes) to the
A-10C

coordinates for Groom Lake AFB:


• 37°13’08’’ North 115°47’07’’ West (Deg, minutes, seconds)
6
• 37°13.133’ North 115°47.116’ West (Deg, minutes, decimal minutes)
• Elevation 4494 ft
7. Edit the latitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (3713133) and
press the LSK (Line Select Key) next to the latitude field (N or S).
8. Edit the longitude of the new waypoint using the keypads/scratchpad (11547116) and
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

press the LSK next to the longitude field (E or W).


9. Edit the elevation of the new waypoint in feet using the keypads/scratchpad (4494)
and press the LSK next to the elevation field (EL).

7a

8a
9b
9a

7b

8b

390
6 – WAYPOINTS Waypoint Number
6
WARTHOG 6.4 – WAYPOINT OFFSET (OSET)
1. If a target location is given to you in relationship to an existing waypoint, you can
A-10C

create a new waypoint with the “Waypoint Offset” function. In this example, the
target is located 0.84 nm of Waypoint 1 with a Magnetic Heading of 343 deg.
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MISSION (you access
all waypoints available for the current in the mission)
3. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER.
This will allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
4. Press the OSET (Offset) FSK.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

5. On the CDU keypad, enter reference waypoint number that we will use to set the
offset from (i.e. “1” for Waypoint 1).
6. Press LSK (Line Select Key) next to Waypoint Number Field.
4
5

Target

Waypoint 1 2 3 391
(MSN000)
6 – WAYPOINTS
WARTHOG 6.4 – WAYPOINT OFFSET (OSET)
Target
7. Our Target position is Waypoint 1 offset by 0.84 nm at a bearing of 343 deg Magnetic.
A-10C

8. On the CDU keypad enter Magnetic Heading and Distance Offset. Magnetic heading and distance are entered
as HHHDD.T when the distance is less than 100 NM, HHHDDD.T when the distance is 100 NM or more but less
than 1000 NM, and HHHDDDD.T when the distance is 1000 NM or more and equal to or less than 9999.9 NM.
As an example, we will enter 346000.8 (magnetic heading 346, distance 0.8 nm). Don’t forget the dot between
000 and 8.
9. Press on the LSK next to MH/DIS to enter Magnetic Heading and Distance offset.
10. On the CDU keypad, type the desired Offset Waypoint name (OFFSET1).
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

11. Select the "Copy to available mission point" LSK (?2 as shown in image below).
12. This will copy the contents of the selected waypoint offset into an available mission point slot that is not
currently being used (slot 2 in the case below).
13. The new waypoint generated from Waypoint 1 offset will be called OFFSET1 and can be selected like any other
normal waypoint. Waypoint 1
(MSN000)

9a

9b
8

11 13
392
10
7 – MARKPOINTS 6 Master Mode Button
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A MARKPOINT
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you access
all markpoints)
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to
OTHER
3. Press Coolie Hat UP to set HUD (Heads-Up Display) as the Sensor of Interest (SOI) DMS (Data Management Switch) 4
4. Select what Markpoint you want to use as your current Steerpoint. Three different
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

methods are available and are listed in the WAYPOINT section. We will use the
DMS switch method.
• While HUD is SOI, press the DMS (Data Management Switch) UP/DOWN to
cycle between waypoints. Each markpoint selected will be set as the
Steerpoint
5. Selected Markpoint acting as the Steerpoint will be displayed on the HUD and
CDU.
6. Once Steerpoint has been designated, cycle Master Mode to NAV using the
Master Mode Button
7. Select STR PT Navigation Mode on the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel)
7

Coolie Hat Switch 3


6

3 HUD is SOI 4

1
393
2
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
A: HOW TO NAVIGATE TO A MARKPOINT
A-10C

8. If the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) isn’t set to STPT (Steerpoint),


press the TMS (Target Management System) Switch AFT LONG to
set the Steerpoint/Markpoint as the SPI. Make sure HUD is SOI
(Sensor of Interest) with the Coolie Hat UP.
Markpoint Bearing Pointers 1 & 2
9. Follow steering cues on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
TMS (Target Management
and HUD (Heads-Up Display) 8
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

System) Switch
Current Heading

Distance to Markpoint (nm)

Distance to Markpoint (nm) Markpoint Symbol


Shown: 5.3 nm to Markpoint

Markpoint Number / Name

HUD is SOI

Time to Go (TTG)

Current Time

Desired Magnetic Heading


towards Markpoint
STPT (Steerpoint) is the SPI 394
8
(Sensor Point of Interest)
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.1 – MARKPOINT NAVIGATION 4

B: HOW TO CONSULT MARKPOINT DATA FROM THE CDU


A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to MARK (you access all markpoints)
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will allow
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the WP (Waypoint) FSK.
4. Select the WAYPOINT branch.
5. Select the markpoint you want to consult entering its number on the CDU keypad, then selecting the 3
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

LSK (Line Select Key) next to the Waypoint Number field. We will select Markpoint C.
• Alternatively, you could also use the +/- rocker key to cycle between markpoints.
5a

Detailed WAYPOINT Data Page


Markpoint Number Markpoint Name

5b Desired Time-On-Target

Copy Data to Available +/- Rocker Key

Markpoint Elevation (ft) Mission Point No. 7

Markpoint Coordinates

Wind Heading / Speed (kts) Coordinate Display Selector


LL: Latitude/Longitude
UTM: Universal Transverse Mercator

1
2 395
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.2 – HOW TO ADD MARKPOINTS
There are three main methods to create markpoints:
A-10C

Overhead Markpoint Weapon Release Button


• If you press the MK (markpoint) button on the CDU, a new
markpoint will be created at the aircraft location. Each time
you press the MK button, a new markpoint will be created in
A-Y order (Z is reserved for a weapon release markpoint).
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Designated Markpoint
• A point on the ground can be set as a markpoint as determined
by the line of sight of an aircraft designation source. These
sources include the HUD TDC, the Targeting Pod, Maverick
Seeker, or TAD Cursor. To create a markpoint in this fashion,
place the designation point at the desired location and then TMS (Target Management
perform a TMS Right Short press on the control stick. Each TMS System) Switch
right short press will create a new markpoint in order (A-Y). To
consult an example of how a markpoint is created using a TGP,
see Weapons section 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (TARGETING POD).

Weapon Event
• Each time a weapon is released, a Z markpoint is created. Each
subsequent weapon release replaces the last Z markpoint.

MK Button (Overhead
Markpoint Creation)

396
7 – MARKPOINTS
WARTHOG 7.3 – USING MARKPOINTS
You can use markpoints just like regular waypoints. This means that they can be used to slave other sensors to them (i.e. targeting pod or Maverick Missile). An example
A-10C

of that is available in the Weapons section 2.6 – GBU-38 JDAM (TARGETING POD).

Maverick and TGP Slaved China Hat Switch FWD LONG


Allows you to slave all sensors (TGP, Maverick, etc.) to the SPI
to Markpoint/STPT
(Sensor Point of Interest), but only if current STPT (Steerpoint) is set
to a markpoint and this steerpoint is the SPI.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Selected Markpoint

Markpoint/STPT is the SPI


(Sensor Point of Interest)

Maverick Page (Slaved


to Markpoint/STPT)

Targeting Pod (TGP) Page


(Slaved to Markpoint/STPT)
397
8 – FLIGHT PLANS
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
A Flight Plan is a pre-determined sequence of up to 40 waypoints. You can have multiple flight plans available.
A-10C

The advantage of the Flight Plan is that it allows you to:


• View all waypoints of interest at once
• Drawing of lines between waypoints on the TAD (route)
• Ability to cycle through each waypoint in the Flight Plan and the selected Flight Plan waypoint becomes the steerpoint
• Create multiple Flight Plans
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Flight Plan Selected


No Flight Plan Selected
398
8 – FLIGHT PLANS
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN
1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to FLT PLAN. FLT PLAN must be selected
A-10C

to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will allow
you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK). Existing Flight Plan
3. Press the FPM (Flight Plan Menu) FSK.
4. On the CDU keyboard, type the name of the new flight plan you want to create (i.e. FLTPLN2).
5. Press the LSK (Line Select Key) next to the NEW FP field to create the new FLTPLN2 flight plan.
6. Press the LSK next to FPBUILD FLTPLN2 to enter the Flight Plan Build page.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

7. The FPBUILD page lists all waypoints selected to make the Flight Plan.
3
Flight Plan FLTPLN2 Composition
Waypoint Waypoint Flight Plan
Number Name Sequence Index
00 INIT POSIT 01
01 MSN000 02 4a

5 02 MSN1 03
03 MSN2 04
04 MSN3 05
05 MSN4 06
4b

1
2 399
8 – FLIGHT PLANS 8 Waypoint 03
MSN2
WARTHOG 8.1 – CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN 9a Waypoint 04
MSN3
8. We want to select Waypoints 0 (INIT POSIT, initial aircraft position), 10a
A-10C

1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 to build our flight plan with.


11a Waypoint 05
9. Enter Waypoint Number 00 (Init Posit Waypoint) on the CDU MSN4
keyboard, then press LSK next to “01” to assign the first waypoint. 13a
10. Enter Waypoint Number 01 (MSN000 Waypoint) on the CDU
keyboard, then press LSK next to “02” to assign second waypoint. Waypoint 02
11. Enter Waypoint Number 02 (MSN1 Waypoint) on the CDU MSN1
12b
keyboard, then press LSK next to “03” to assign third waypoint. Waypoint 00
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

12. Press Page Selector Rocker Switch to go to Page 2. INIT POSIT


13. Enter Waypoint Number 03 (MSN2 Waypoint) on the CDU
keyboard, then press LSK next to “04” to assign fourth waypoint.
Waypoint 01
14. Repeat for Waypoint Number 04 (fifth waypoint) and Waypoint
MSN000
Number 05 (sixth waypoint).
9c

10c

9b 10b

11c 11b

13c

14

13b
12a 400
12c
8 – FLIGHT PLANS Existing Flight Plans

WARTHOG 8.2 – USING A FLIGHT PLAN


To select a flight plan from the list of available flight plans:
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob to FLT PLAN. FLT PLAN must be
selected to display the flight plan route on the Tactical Awareness Display (TAD).
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to OTHER. This will
allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
3. Press the FPM (Flight Plan Menu) FSK.
4. Press on the LSK next to the flight plan you want to select (FLTPLN2 in our case). The asterisk
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

will indicator the active flight plan.


3
5. To select either “Automatic” or “Manual” waypoint sequencing, you can press on the LSK next
to your active flight plan to toggle the AUTO or MAN mode. “Automatic Waypoint Sequencing”
is a fancy way of saying that when you are close enough to the selected steerpoint/waypoint,
the navigation system will select the next waypoint in the flight plan sequence automatically.

Selected Flight Plan


1
Flight Plan Sequencing Mode
2 401
8 – FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan FLTPLN2 Composition

WARTHOG 8.2 – USING A FLIGHT PLAN Waypoint


Number
Waypoint
Name
Flight Plan
Sequence Index
6. On the TAD (Tactical Awareness Display), you will now see 00 INIT POSIT 01
A-10C

that waypoints in the flight plan sequence are now linked


01 MSN000 02
with green lines.
02 MSN1 03
03 MSN2 04
04 MSN3 05
05 MSN4 06
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Waypoint 02 Waypoint 02
MSN1 MSN1
FLTPLN2 Flight Plan
Current Steerpoint
Waypoint Sequence

402
9 – DIVERT FUNCTION
WARTHOG
If you are lost, you can use the CDU (Control Display Unit) to help you find a place to
land. The “DIVERT” function offers you information on the closest airfields available.
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit) Selector Knob to
OTHER. This will allow you to use the Function Select Keys (FSK).
2. Make your HUD SOI by pressing COOLIE HAT UP SHORT. 1
3. Select CDU (Control Display Unit) page.
4. On the UFC, press “FUNC” (function) and “2” (NAV functions)
5. On the CDU page, a new NAV menu will appear. Press the OSB to select the
2a
“DIVERT” menu.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

2b HUD is SOI
Coolie Hat Switch

4a

4b

5a 5c

5b
3 403
9 – DIVERT FUNCTION
WARTHOG
6. The divert menu will display the closest airfields to you. If we want to go to Khasab, just by having a quick look
at it, we know that Khasab is already stocked in our computer in WAYPOINT 60. We also know that we need to
A-10C

go to a heading of 125 for 14.5 nautical miles, with a TTG (time to go) of about 2 minutes 58 seconds.
7. If we select the Khasab OSB, we can have even more details in the FLDINFO (Field Information) page.
8. The FLDINFO menu for Khasab shows us that there is one runway oriented at 190 with an elevation of 48 ft
and a length of 7513 ft, that there is an ILS system in place set at frequency 110.30, that there is a TACAN
station set to 84 and that the radio frequency to communicate with the control tower is 124.350.
9. Even better: if you look at your HUD you will now see that Khasab is your current steerpoint and that the HUD
is showing you where to go to find it.
10. If you want to find another airfield or follow another waypoint, since your HUD is already SOI you can simply
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

use DMS UP SHORT or DMS DOWN SHORT to cycle through more waypoints. DMS (Data Management Switch)

9
7b

7a

404
10 – ADF (AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER) NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
The Automatic Direction Finder of the A-10C can only track radio transmissions sent on either UHF FM or VHF FM frequency bands. This means that it cannot track
NDBs in the KHz frequency range.
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

405
10 – ADF (AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER) NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
1. On Navigation Mode Select Panel, make sure ILS and TCN buttons are not selected
2. Set UHF Mode to ADF Lubber Line (Current Heading)
A-10C

3. Set UHF Frequency to MNL (Manual) Mode.


4. Set UHF manual frequency to 255.000 MHz.
5. Confirm UHF signal is received with the UHF HOMING light illuminated.
6. On HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), follow Bearing Pointer 1. Keep in mind that
no range information is available.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Aircraft Symbol 6
4
Bearing Pointer 1

3
2

1
406
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations are navigation aids
typically used by the military and provide you directional and You are here
A-10C

distance guidance. They can be installed on airdromes, air


refueling tankers or even aircraft carriers.

1. We will track Kutaisi’s TACAN 44X.


2. Power up the TACAN control panel by setting the Mode
Selector to T/R (Transmit-Receive).
3. Set the KTS TACAN frequency (44X) on the TACAN panel. KTS TACAN
1
Clicking on the right knob sets X/Y, while scrolling mousewheel
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

44X
on left and right selector knobs set 44.
4. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Selection Panel), press “TCN”
to slave the HSI to the TACAN beacon
5. Set the desired course to the TACAN using the HSI Course
Select knob (068)

Selected Course 5b

Course Set Knob 5a

3 2

4 407
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION Bearing Pointer 1
Lubber Line (Current Heading) Points to magnetic bearing of
WARTHOG selected TACAN station when
6. After a few seconds, the HSI will display DME (Distance
TACAN mode is selected.
Measuring Equipment) distance to the TACAN in nautical
A-10C

miles.
7. Steer the aircraft towards the TACAN CDI (Course Deviation
Indicator) Reference Line. As you approach the radial, the
line deviation with the centerline of the HSI will gradually
Range Indicator (nm)
diminish.
8. The direction of the TACAN beacon will be displayed by the
pointy end of the Course arrow and Bearing Pointer 1 . Course Arrow Selected Course
9. CDI (Course Deviation Indicator) will indicate how far off
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

the TACAN radial course (068) you are.


10. When CDI Reference line is centered, this means you are on
the 068 radial.
11. Then, Turn towards the TACAN Bearing Pointer 1 (or course
needle) to follow the radial to the runway. Aircraft Symbol TACAN CDI (Course Deviation
Indicator)
Fly towards this line!

Bearing Pointer 1 Reciprocal Heading

Course Set Knob

408
11 – TACAN NAVIGATION
WARTHOG
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

a b c d

b
a

d
c

KTS TACAN
Channel 44X
409
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE
WARTHOG
A “Bullseye” or “Anchor Point” is a fictional point in space that serves as a common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces. If you know where the
bullseye is and the enemy doesn’t, it gives you a way to communicate positions without the enemy knowing where to look from. Your wingmen and AWACS will often refer
A-10C

to “bulls” or “bullseye” on the radio. A bullseye call, used to communicate your position, is done in the following format:

• Bearing from bullseye


• Range to bullseye
• Altitude

Bullseye Explanation by JediLinks: https://youtu.be/vgcXcfeGb2M


Bullseye / Anchor Point
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

(Set on Waypoint 2)

Bullseye, 17 nm
Bearing 180 from
Hornet 411

Hornet 421
You
410
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE
WARTHOG
You can set the bullseye on any existing waypoint available in your database. This short tutorial will show you how to create an “Anchor Point” on Waypoint 2 and use it
as bullseye reference.
A-10C

Desired Bullseye / Anchor Point


Location (Waypoint 2)
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Desired Bullseye / Anchor Point


Location (Waypoint 2)

You

You

Current Bullseye / Anchor Point Location


Current Bullseye / Anchor Point Location

411
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE
WARTHOG
To set an Anchor Point on a Waypoint (i.e. Waypoint 02):
A-10C

1. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) Steerpoint Selector Knob


to MISSION (you access all waypoints available for the
current in the mission) 3
2. Set Auxiliary Avionics Panel (AAP) CDU (Control Display Unit)
Selector Knob to WAYPT. This will display the WP INFO Page.
3. Select ANCHOR PT branch
4. On CDU keypad, enter waypoint number you want to use as
the new Bullseye / Anchor Point Reference (02).
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

5. Press on the LSK next to the Waypoint Number field.


6. Press on the LSK next to HUD OFF to display Anchor Point /
Bullseye information on the Heads-Up Display.
7 4a
7. Select ANCHR mode on Navigation Mode Select Panel

5a

6a

4b

5b

1
Anchor Point has not 2
been defined yet

6b 412
12 – ANCHOR POINT/BULLSEYE Anchor Point Reference Waypoint Number
WARTHOG Current Waypoint Name
8. New Anchor Point is now set on Waypoint 2. Consult Anchor Point Reference
CDU, HUD, HSI and TAD for bullseye information. Waypoint Name
A-10C

Note: we took an existing waypoint and set it as the Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data
Anchor Point, but we could have also created a new Time-to-Go to Anchor Point
waypoint and called it “Bullseye2”. Desired Magnetic Heading to Anchor Point
Distance to Anchor Point (nm)
Current Waypoint Data
Time-to-Go to Waypoint
Heading to Waypoint
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Distance to Waypoint (nm)

Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data


Reference Waypoint Name
North Reference Desired Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point /Distance from Anchor Point (nm)

DMH
Anchor Point (Bullseye)
043 Set on Waypoint 2

You

Anchor Point (Bullseye) Data


Desired Magnetic Heading from Anchor Point / Distance from Anchor Point (nm)

413
13 – ILS TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
1. ILS approach
2. Final Approach
A-10C

3. Outer ILS marker


4. Inner ILS marker
5. Missed Approach
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

414
13 – ILS TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
Our ILS approach will be done to Batumi airfield. Using our CDU trick learned in the “DIVERT” sub-section, we can easily find the ILS frequency (110.30), runway
heading (120 Magnetic Heading / 126 True Heading) and radio tower frequency (131.000).
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

415
13 – ILS TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
1. Set your VHF radio to TR (transmit-receive), set frequency mode to MAN and set frequency to 131.000. Then, call the tower for inbound request.
2. Turn ILS (Instrument Landing System) power ON by right clicking on the PWR switch.
A-10C

3. Enter ILS frequency 110.30 rotating the PWR and VOL knobs with the mousewheel.
4. Set your HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) course to 120 (runway magnetic heading) with your mousewheel.
5. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Selection Panel), set homing mode to ILS and navigate towards runway.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

1c

4
1a

1b

5
3 416
13 – ILS TUTORIAL Localizer Steering Bar
WARTHOG
6. Align yourself with the runway using the
HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), CDI
A-10C

(Course Deviation Indicator) and ADI


(Attitude Director Indicator) Localizer
Steering Bar
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Distance to Runway (nm)

CDI (Course Deviation Indicator)

a b c
c
b

417
13 – ILS TUTORIAL Both Localizer & Glide Slope
Steering Bars are centered.
WARTHOG
7. Once you are close enough to the ILS (approx. 10 nm), 7b Glide Slope Steering Bar 8 You are set for landing!
the Glide Slope Fail Flag will disappear and provide you
A-10C

guidance in the vertical plane to perform an approach


with 3 degrees of glide slope.
8. Fly the aircraft to the glide slope by use the Glide Slope
Steering bar and Glide Slope Deviation Indicator. Both
should be centered.
Glide Slope Deviation Indicator
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

7a

Localizer Steering Bar Glide Slope Deviation Indicator


must be centered as well

Glide Slope Fail Flag


Localizer Steering Bar Centered
= Localizer is captured!

418
13 – ILS TUTORIAL
WARTHOG
6. When you have captured the ILS localizer (no lateral deviation from runway axis) and captured the glide slope as well, deploy landing gear.
7. Deploy flaps (fully extended) and airbrakes (40 % extended)
A-10C

8. Adjust throttle and trim the aircraft to get a good Angle of Attack for landing. The AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer should display a “circle”, which means that you are “On
Speed”. This means that the angle of attack you have will maintain an adequate airspeed for landing.
9. Use Radar Altitude as a reference
10. On Glide Path Final Approach
• -500 ft/min descent rate
11. Touchdown by letting yourself glide on the runway.
12. No need to flare.
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING

Radar Altimeter (ft)

AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer


The indexer presents the information by displaying illuminated
green and yellow symbols.
• Low-speed symbol "\ /“
• On-speed symbol "circle“
• High-speed symbol "/ \".
• Slightly low/high speed is indicated by the on-speed and
low/high speed symbols coming on simultaneously.
Note: The AOA indexer lights operate only when the nose gear is 419
down.
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING WARTHOG
13 – ILS TUTORIAL

420
A-10C
PART 16 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING WARTHOG

421
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – WHY WE ALL HATE IT
WARTHOG
Air-to-air refueling is one of the hardest, most hated, and most frustrating tasks in DCS. Ever. Of all time.
A-10C

Why? Well, one of the main reasons for the difficulty behind refueling is the skill required to do formation flying. Flying in
formation with another aircraft requires much more practice than you would initially think. Another reason is pure physics:
there is this thing called “wake turbulence”. An aircraft flies through a fluid: air. Just like with any fluid, if you have something
that displaces itself through it at a certain speed, the fluid will become disrupted (turbulence). Wingtip vortices and jetwash
are both effects of this simple concept. Wake turbulence is the reason why airliners need to wait a minimum time between
takeoffs: flying through disrupted air will destabilize the aircraft and it is unsafe, especially during critical phases of flight like
takeoff and landing.

Unfortunately, wake turbulence is something a pilot has to deal with during air-to-air refueling. This is why the aircraft will fly
just fine when approaching the tanker, but start wobbling around when flying in close proximity of the refueling boom and
tanker engines.
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

NOTE:
Some pilots prefer to set their joystick to
pitch and roll axes curvatures set with a
curve of 15 and a deadzone of 5. Control
curves are up to your personal
preference.

422
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
WARTHOG 1
1. Read your mission briefing to know the TACAN station channel of your KC-135
Tanker (10X) and the VHF AM channel frequency you can communicate with it
A-10C

(150.000).
2. Set your TACAN to “A/A T/R” and to tanker TACAN frequency (10X) by scrolling the
mousewheel.
3. On the NMSP (Navigation Mode Select Panel), press “TCN” to slave the HSI to the
TACAN beacon.
4. Set your VHF AM radio to T/R and channel 150.000.
5. Press Mic Switch FWD and contact tanker (F6).
4
6. Select “Intent to refuel” in the tanker menu. The tanker will give you an altitude
(usually 20,000 ft or 10,000 ft) to rendezvous at.
7. Use the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) to line up with the KC-135 tanker.
Needle with a “1” on it points towards the tanker. Distance to tanker is displayed on
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

the HSI.
7
7

3 423
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
WARTHOG
8. Open fuel trap door.
9. Once you are close enough, call the tanker to begin pre-contact. If you are not lined up properly, he will tell
A-10C

you “Return”. If you are lined up properly, he will grant you permission to approach.
10. Make sure you are perfectly trimmed before beginning your approach.
11. Set all your weapon systems to SAFE.
12. Fly formation with the tanker, not the boom.
13. Make sure the “READY” light is lit.
8

9
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

13

424
A-10C
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING WARTHOG
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO

425
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
WARTHOG
14. Once contact with the boom is done, you will have a “LATCHED” notice. Use the tanker’s engines as a reference to maintain contact.
15. If you disconnect the boom prematurely (and it WILL happen, trust me), make sure that you press your “Nosewheel Steering” pinky switch on your HOTAS joystick
A-10C

(or “INSERT” key binding) to reset your fuel trap door. If you fail to reset it, the boom operator will not be able to make contact with your trap door again (refueling
light will display “READY” again).
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

426
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – HOW TO
WARTHOG
16. Refueling procedure will be done when you have the “DISCONNECT” warning light.
17. Close fuel trap door and resume flight.
A-10C

Here is a nice Air-to-Air refueling example: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2qFrmfNEilM


Special thanks to Derbysieger for creating a helpful written tutorial as well http://steamcommunity.com/sharedfiles/filedetails/?id=170423297
PART 17 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

427
RESOURCES
WARTHOG
Bunyap’s Youtube Channel
https://www.youtube.com/user/4023446/playlists
A-10C

Gerry Abbott’s Youtube Channel


https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL8E198A311F28EA74

Ralfidude’s Idiot Guide to the A-10C: Quick Tips


https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9M8yiAjQ7ps

Eagle Dynamics A-10C Wiki


http://en.wiki.eagle.ru/wiki/DCS_A-10C_Guides,_Tutorials_and_Reference_Documents

A-10C Manuals and Books (awesometacular resource!)


http://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=60293
PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES

VTAG Handbook
http://vtacticalairgroup.net/downloads/common/VTAG%20Handbook.pdf

VTAG SOP (Standard Operating Procedures)


http://vtacticalairgroup.net/downloads/a-10/VTAG%20SOP.pdf

476th Virtual Fighter Group Database


http://www.476vfightergroup.com/downloads.php

476th Virtual Fighter Group Guides


http://www.476vfightergroup.com/downloads.php?do=cat&id=43

476th Virtual Fighter Group Youtube Channel


https://www.youtube.com/user/476vFG/videos

Rob10’s Weapon List


http://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=73752
428
ACRONYM TABLE (1/2)
WARTHOG
Countermeasure Set
A-A Air-to-Air ASL Azimuth Steering Line CMSP EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature GS Ground Speed
Panel
A-10C

Inertially Aided
A-G Air-to-Ground ATC Air Traffic Control CR Coordinate Ranging EHE Expected Horizontal Error IAM
Munition
Engine Monitoring
AAP Auxiliary Avionics Panel BATA Bullets at Target Altitude CR Consent to Release EMI IAS Indicated Airspeed
Instruments
AAS Air-to-Air Submenu BHOT Black Hot DLZ Dynamic Launch Zone EO Electro Optical IFF Identify Friend or Foe
Armament Control Integrated Flight and
ACP BIT Built In Test DMS Data Management Switch ET Elapsed Time IFFCC
Panel Fire Control Computer
Automatic Direction Central Air Data Instrumented Landing
ADF CADC DP Display Page EVE Expected Vertical Error ILS
Finding Computer System
Attitude Direction Captive Air Training Inertial Navigation
ADI CATM DRA Dual Rail Adapter FA Fault Acknowledge INS
Indicator Missile System
Firing Evaluation Display Interstage Turbine
AGL Above Ground Level CBU Cluster Bomb Unit DRC Desired Release Cue FEDS ITT
System Temperature
PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES

Digital Stores Heading Attitude


AGM Air-to-Ground Missile CCD Charged Coupled Device DSMS FLIR Forward Looking Infrared HARS
Management System Reference System
Armament HUD Continuously Computed High Explosive,
AHCP CCIP DTOT Desired Time On Target FM Frequency Modulation HEI
Control Panel Impact Point Incendiary
Continuously Computed
AIM Air Intercept Missile CCRP DTS Data Transfer System FOM Figure of Merit HOF Height of Function
Release Point
Course Deviation Digital Terrain System Hands On Throttle and
AM Amplitude Modulation CDI DTSAS FOV Field of View HOTAS
Indicator Application Software Stick
Horizontal Position
AMIL Air Mass Impact Line CDU Control Display Unit DTTG Desired Time To Go GBL Gun Bore Line HPU
Uncertainty
Central Interface Control Enhanced Attitude Horizontal Situation
AOA Angle of Attack CICU EAC GBU Guided Bomb Unit HSI
Unit Control Indicator
Electronic Ground Collision Avoidance
APU Auxiliary Power Unit CM Combat Mix ECM GCAS HUD Heads Up Display
Countermeasures System
Joint Directed Attack
AR Aerial Refueling CMS Countermeasure Set EFC Emergency Flight Control GMT Greenwich Mean Time JDAM
Munition
Attitude Reference Countermeasure Set Joint Terminal429
Attack
ARS CMSC EGI Embedded GPS INS GPS Global Positioning System JTAC
Symbol Control Controller
ACRONYM TABLE (2/2)
WARTHOG
JTRS Joint Tactical Radio System NMSP Navigation Mode Select Panel SER Single Ejector Rack TVV Total Velocity Vector
A-10C

KIAS Knots Indicated Airspeed NWS Nosewheel Steering SOI Sensor of Interest UFC Up Front Controller

LAAP Low Altitude Autopilot NVIS Night Vision Imaging System SPI Sensor Point of Interest UHF Ultra High Frequency

LAR Look Aside Ranging ORP Optimal Release Point SPJ Self Protection Jammer VHF Very High Frequency
Low Altitude Safety and Targeting
LASTE OSB Option Select Button SRU Shop Replaceable Unit VPU Vertical Position Uncertainty
Enhancement
Tactical Awareness
LOS Line Of Sight OWC Obstacle Warning Cue TAD VVI Vertical Velocity Indicator
Display
LRU Line Replaceable Unit PAC Precision Attitude Control TAS True Airspeed WCMD Wind Corrected Munition Dispensor

MAP Missed Approach Point PBIL Projected Bomb Impact Line TDC Target Designation Cursor WCN Warning, Caution, and Notes
PART 18 – OTHER RESOURCES

MFCD Multifunction Color Display PR Passive Ranging TER Triple Ejector Rack

MGRS Military Grid Reference System PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency TGP Targeting Pod
Target Identification Set
MMCB Master Mode Control Button RGS Required Ground Speed TISL
Laser
Target Management
MRC Minimum Range Cue RIAS Required Indicated Airspeed TMS
Switch
Time of Fall / Time of
MRFCS Manual Reversion Flight Control System RTAS Required True Airspeed TOF
Flight
MRGS Multiple Reference Gunsight RWR Radar Warning Receiver TOT Time On Target

MRS Minimum Range Staple SADL Situational Awareness Datalink TP Target Practice

MSL Mean Sea Level SAI Standby Attitude Indicator TTG Time To Go

MWS Missile Warning System SAS Stability Augmentation System TTRN Time to Release Numeric 430
THANK YOU TO ALL MY PATRONS
Creating these guides is no easy task, and I would like to take the time to properly thank every single one of my Patreon supporters. The following people have donated a very generous
amount to help me keep supporting existing guides and work on new projects as well:

• Ed Wallitt
• Hoggit
• Casey Charles

431
432

You might also like